Subaru Impreza Manual 2001

1
Issued: May 2000 A

Printed in USA
TOKYO. JAPAN A1820BE

IMPREZA U.S.A. (E) A1820BE A
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owners
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read this
manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and its
operation. For information not found in this Owners Manual, such
as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact the
dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or the nearest
SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and illustrations found in this manu-
al are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY INDUS-
TRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and designs
at any time without prior notice and without incurring any obligation
to make the same or similar changes on vehicles previously sold.
This Owners Manual applies to all models and covers all equip-
ment, including factory installed options. Some explanations, there-
fore may be for equipment not installed in your vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
and are registered trademarks of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.
copyright 2000 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

IMPREZA U.S.A. (E) A1820BEA
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
HGF001AB
HGF002AB
HGF003AB
HGF004AB
Warranties
B Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru of America, Inc. and sold
at retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the United States come
with the following warranties:
D SUBARU Limited Warranty
D Emission Control Systems Warranty
D Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet . Please read these war-
ranties carefully.
B Warranties for Canada

All SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at
retail by an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada come with the fol-
lowing warranties:
D SUBARU Limited Warranty
D Anti-Corrosion Warranty
D Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the Warranty and Service Booklet. Please read these warranties
carefully.
NOTE
This vehicle does not contain mercury devices
or parts.
CONTINUED
i
How to use this owners manual

J Using your Owners manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully read this manual. To protect
yourself and extend the service life of your vehicle, follow the instructions
in this manual. Failure to observe these instructions may result in serious
injury and damage to your vehicle.
This manual is composed of thirteen chapters. Each chapter begins with
a brief table of contents, so you can usually tell at a glance if that chap-
ter contains the information you want.
Chapter 1: Doors and Locks
This chapter informs you how to operate the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 2: Seat, seat belt and SRS airbag
This chapter informs you how to use the seat and seat belt and contains
precautions for the SRS airbag.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the operation of instrument panel indica-
tors and how to use the instruments and other switches.
Chapter 4: Climate Control
This chapter informs you how to operate the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you have a problem while driving,
such as a flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 9: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 10: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you how to keep your SUBARU running properly.
ii
Chapter 11: Specifications

This chapter informs you about dimension and capacities of your
SUBARU.
Chapter 12: Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform tire quality grading standards
and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 13: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all thats in this manual. You can use it to
quickly find something you want to read.
J Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this
manual.
These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in
injury to you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this
manual carefully in order to gain a better understanding of how to use
your SUBARU vehicle safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death
could result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if the caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of
your vehicle.
CONTINUED
iii
J Safety symbol
HS0008
You will find a circle with a slash through it in this manual. This symbol
means Do not , Do not do this , or Do not let this happen , depending
upon the context.
Safety precautions when driving

SEAT BELT AND SRS AIRBAG
WARNING
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seat belts BE-
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se-
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-
cident.
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS (Supplemental
Restraint System) airbag does not do away with the need to fas-
ten seat belts. In combination with the seat belts, it offers the
best combined protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seat belt increases the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.
D The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag
iv
deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS air-
bag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should al-
ways sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehicle control and
the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible
and sit upright and well back in the seat.
Carefully read the sections Seat belts and SRS airbag in chapter 2 of
this owners manual for instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system and SRS airbag system.
CHILD SAFETY
WARNING
D Never hold a child on your lap or in your arms while the ve-
hicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from in-
jury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the vehicle.
D While riding in the vehicle, infants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for the childs age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and be restrained using the seat
belts. According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the
seat.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seat belt.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of
age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained.
Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk be-
ing injured from deployment is greater.
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
CONTINUED
v
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Always use the child safety locks whenever a child rides in the
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally
opened the door and fell out. Refer to the Door locks section in
chapter 1.
D Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the vehicle. Failure to follow this pro-
cedure could result in injury to a child operating the power win-
dow. Refer to the Power windows section in chapter 1.
D Never leave unattended children in the vehicle. They could ac-
cidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent opera-
tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, temperature in a
closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause se-
vere or possibly fatal injuries to them.
Carefully read the sections Child restraint systems , SRS airbag and
Seat belts in chapter 2 of this owners manual for instructions and pre-
cautions concerning the child restraint system, seat belt system and SRS
airbag system.
ENGINE EXHAUST GAS (CARBON MONOXIDE)
WARNING
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system
always works properly.
vi
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
DRINKING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Alcohol in the
bloodstream delays your reaction and impairs your perception,
judgment and attentiveness. If you drive after drinking even if
you drink just a little it will increase the risk of being involved in
a serious or fatal accident, injuring or killing yourself, your pas-
sengers and others. In addition, if you are injured in the accident,
alcohol may increase the severity of that injury.
Please dont drink and drive.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since

alcohol affects all people differently, you may have consumed too much
alcohol to drive safely even if the level of alcohol in your blood is below
the legal limit. The safest thing you can do is never drink and drive. How-
ever if you have no choice but to drive, stop drinking and sober up com-
pletely before getting behind the wheel.
DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the counter and prescription) that
can delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive after taking them, it may in-
crease your, your passengers and other persons risk of being
involved in a serious or fatal accident.
CONTINUED
vii
If you are taking any drugs, check with your doctor or pharmacist or read
the literature that accompanies the medication to determine if the drug
you are taking can impair your driving ability. Do not drive after taking
any medications that can make you drowsy or otherwise affect your abil-
ity to safely operate a motor vehicle. If you have a medical condition that
requires you to take drugs, please consult with your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence of any illicit mind-altering
drugs. For your own health and well-being, we urge you not to take ille-
gal drugs in the first place and to seek treatment if you are addicted to
those drugs.
DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR SLEEPY
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your reaction will be delayed and
your perception, judgment and attentiveness will be impaired. If
you drive when tired or sleepy, your, your passengers and other
persons chances of being involved in a serious accident may in-
crease.
Please do not continue to drive but instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you should make periodic rest stops to
refresh yourself before continuing on your journey. When possible, you
should share the driving with others.
CAR PHONES AND DRIVING
CAUTION
A drivers use of a car phone can be distracting and if special
care is not taken, can lead to an accident. If you use a car phone
while driving, make an extra effort to pay attention to the road
and to traffic at all times. If you can safely do so, it is best to pull
off to the side of the road before using your car phone.
viii
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and may even violate govern-
mental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems
resulting from modification may not be covered under warranties.
DRIVING WITH PETS

Unrestrained pets can interfere with your driving and distract your atten-
tion from driving. In a collision or sudden stop, unrestrained pets or
cages can be thrown around inside the vehicle and hurt you or your pas-
sengers. Besides, the pets can be hurt under these situations. It is also
for their own safety that pets should be properly restrained in your
vehicle. Restrain a pet with a special traveling harness which can be se-
cured to the rear seat with a seat belt or use a pet carrier which can be
secured to the rear seat by routing a seat belt through the carriers han-
dle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers in the front passengers seat. For
further information, consult your veterinarian, local animal protection so-
ciety or pet shop.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.
CONTINUED
ix
GAS STATION REFERENCE

Fuel:
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87
AKI or higher. This octane rating is the average of the Re-
search Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is com-
monly referred to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Refer to the Fuel Requirement section in this manual.
Fuel capacity:
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil:
Use only API classification SJ or SH with the words
ENERGY CONSERVING II
or the new API certification mark displayed on the contain-
er.
Engine oil capacity:
4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Cold tire pressure:
See the label located under the drivers door latch.
Table of contents
Doors and locks 1

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbag 2
Instruments and controls 3
Climate control 4
Audio 5
Interior equipment 6
Starting and operating 7
In case of emergency 8
Appearance care 9
Maintenance and service 10
Specifications 11
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 12
Index 13
CONTINUED
xi
A
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Accessory power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Air filtration system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
AM/FM stereo radio with cassette player (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function
(except drivers and 2-point type seatbelt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Braking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Bulb chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
C
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Cargo anchorage eyelets (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Cassette player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
13-2
Index
Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Cleaning aluminum wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Clutch fluid (2.5 liter MT models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Coin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46, 9-4
Cruise control (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
D
Dashboard storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Door open warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Driving in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Driving tips for AWD vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
E
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function
(except 2-point type seatbelt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 13
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Engine hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
13-3
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
F
Fastening the seatbelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Fog light (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Fog light switch (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Fold down rear seat Wagon and OUTBACK SPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Front differential gear oil (Automatic transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Front turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AWD AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Fuel economy hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Fuel filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Fuses and circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
G
Gauge pack (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
H
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 8-2
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
High beam indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
13-4
Index
I
If the sunroof can not be closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Illumination brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12, 10-46
Installing carrying attachments on the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Interior light, spot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
J
Jump starting ..................................................................... 8-4
K
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Keyless entry system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Key reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
L
License plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Loading your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Luggage cover (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
M
Main fuse and fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 13
Maintenance tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Manual transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Master, submaster and valet key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
13-5
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
N
New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) . . . . . . 7-3
O
Odometer/Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Off road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
P
Parking brake stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Parking light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Parking your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Power door locking switches (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Power windows (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Precautions against vehicle modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Preparing to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
R
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Rear combination lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Rear differential gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Rear gate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Rear seat access (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Rear viscous limited slip differential (For RS models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
13-6
Index
Replacement of brake pad and lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Replacement of windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Reporting safety defects (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Roof rack (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
S
Seatbelt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Seatbelt safety tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Seatbelt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13, 3-5
Security system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Shopping bag hook (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Side turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Spotlight (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
SRS airbag operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
SRS airbag system monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
SRS airbag system servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
SRS airbag system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
State emission testing (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 13
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Sunroof (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
13-7
T
Tachometer (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Temperature A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Temporary spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Tire changing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Top tether anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Towing eyelets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Traction AA, A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Trailer hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Trunk lid (Sedan and Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
U
Uniform tire quality grading standards ..................................... 12-2
V
Vanity mirror (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Vehicle capacity weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Vehicle with drivers and front passengers SRS airbags
and lap/shoulder restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights .................................................. 3-5
13-8
Index
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Waxing and polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
When luggage is put on the slats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Windshield washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Windshield wipers and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
13
13-9
Doors and locks

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Master, submaster and valet key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1
Key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Power door locking switches (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Child safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Keyless entry system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Security system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Power windows (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Trunk lid (Sedan and Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Rear gate (Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Fuel filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Engine hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Sunroof (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
If the sunroof can not be closed ...................................... 1-33
Roof rack (if equipped) ................................................. 1-34
When luggage is put on the slats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Installing carrying attachments on the cross bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Keys
Submaster key
Master key
Valet key
Key number
HG0362
J Master, submaster and valet key

Three types of keys are provided for your vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all locks on your vehicle.
D Ignition switch
D Doors
D Trunk or Rear gate
D Glove compartment
The valet key fits only the ignition switch and door locks. You can keep
the trunk and glove compartment locked when you leave your vehicle
and valet key at a parking facility.
J Key number
The key number is stamped on the metal plate attached to the key. Write
down the key number and keep it in another safe place, not in the ve-
hicle. This number is needed to make a replacement key if you lose your
key or lock it inside the vehicle.
1-2
Doors and locks
Door locks
B Locking and unlocking from the outside
n For Vehicles with power door locking switches
1
Unlock
Lock
OM-H0387
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Locking without the key Locking without the key
1 Press the
lock lever
1
2
2 Close the
door while 1 Push the power door locking
hold the switch rearward.
handle up. OM-H0008 2 Close the door. HG0333
To lock the door from the outside without the key, press the end of the
lock lever down on the door and then close the door.
To lock the door from the outside using the power door locking switch,
push the switch rearward (LOCK side) and then close the door. In
this case, all closed doors and the rear gate (for wagon and OUT-
CONTINUED
1-3
BACK SPORT) are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and the rear gate (for wagon and
OUTBACK SPORT) are locked before leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key inside the vehicle before
locking the doors from the outside without the key.
n For vehicles without power door locking switches
Unlock
Lock
OM-H0387
To lock the door from the outside with the key, turn the key toward the
rear. To unlock the door, turn the key toward the front.
Lift the outside door handle to open an unlocked door.
Locking without the key (Front door) Locking without the key (Rear door)
1 Press the
1
lock lever
2
2 Close the
door while 1 Push the power door locking
holding the switch rearward.
handle up. OM-H0008 2 Close the door. HG0334
To lock the front door from the outside without the key, press the end
of the lock lever down on the door and hold the outside door handle
1-4
Doors and locks
up while closing the door.

To lock the rear door from the outside without the key, press the end
of the lock lever down on the door and then close the door.
OUTBACK SPORT) are locked before leaving your vehicle. 1
NOTE
locking the doors from the outside without the key.
B Locking and unlocking from the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat belts and child restraints, lock-
ing the doors reduces the chance of being thrown out of the ve-
hicle in an accident.
It also helps prevent passengers from falling out if a door is acci-
dentally opened, and intruders from unexpectedly opening doors
and entering your vehicle.
Red mark
Inside door handle
Lock
Unlock
OM-H0009
To lock the door from the inside, press the end of the lock lever down.
To unlock the door from the inside, pull the front end of the lock lever.
The red mark on the lock lever appears when the door is unlocked.
CONTINUED
1-5
Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.

OUTBACK SPORT) are closed and locked before starting to drive.
J Power door locking switches (if equipped)

Drivers switch Front passengers switch
Unlock Unlock
Lock Lock
HG0335
All doors and the rear gate can be locked and unlocked by the power
door locking switches located at the drivers side and the front passen-
gers side doors.
To lock the doors, push the switch rearward.
To unlock the doors, push the switch forward.
When you close the doors after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked.
NOTE
locking the doors from the outside using power door locking
switches.
1-6
Doors and locks
J Child safety locks
Unlock
Lock
HG0267
WARNING
Always use the child safety lock whenever a child rides in the
rear seat. Serious injury could result if a child accidentally
opened the door and fell out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock that prevents the doors from being
opened even if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the lock position, the door cannot
be opened from inside regardless of the position of the inner door handle
lock lever. The door can only be opened from the outside.
CONTINUED
1-7
Keyless entry system (if equipped)
CAUTION
D Do not expose the transmitter to severe shocks, such as those
experienced as a result of dropping or throwing.
D Do not take the transmitter apart except when replacing the
battery.
D Do not get the transmitter wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with a
cloth immediately.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the users authority to
operate the equipment.
The keyless entry system has the following functions.

D Locking and unlocking the doors (and rear gate on the wagon and
OUTBACK SPORT) without a key
D Arming and disarming the security system (if your vehicle is equipped
with an optional security system). See the next section Security system
(if equipped) for detailed information.
The receiver inside your vehicles keyless entry system and the remote
control transmitters are designed together to have an average operating
range of 25 to 50 feet (8 to 15 meters) during ideal conditions. Although
at times you may experience range greater than that, there may be occa-
sions when range is less than normal. Atmospheric conditions or interfer-
ence from other RF-emitting devices can effectively reduce transmitter
range.
1-8
Doors and locks
B System operation
Keyless entry functions do not operate when vehicle ignition is ON.
HS1000BB
n Locking the doors

Press the LOCK button to lock all doors (and the rear gate on the
wagon and OUTBACK SPORT). The parking lights will flash one time.
n Unlocking the doors
To unlock the drivers door only, press and release the UNLOCK but-
ton.
To unlock all doors (and the rear gate on the wagon and OUTBACK
SPORT), press and hold the UNLOCK button.
The parking lights will flash one time.
The vehicles interior (courtesy) light will illuminate for 60 seconds or
until vehicle is started.
NOTE
1. Parking lights will flash when the vehicles battery is discon-
nected and reconnected.
To stop lights from flashing, either:
D Press remote transmitter UNLOCK button once.
D Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and press pro-
gramming button for one second (see location below).
2. The vehicles interior (courtesy) light and door open warning
light (DOOR AJAR indicator) will illuminate for 60 seconds when
the ignition is turned off, or until the doors are locked with the
CONTINUED
1-9
remote transmitter.
3. The instrument panel lights will flash when the parking lights
flash.
4. Your SUBARU Keyless Entry System is equipped with two
remote transmitters.
B Programming button location
HS1001BB
The Programming Button is located under the drivers side dash

beneath the diagnostic connector.
B Adding or deleting remote transmitters
Up to four (4) transmitters can be programmed to your keyless entry
system.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating another keyless entry or
security system within range of your vehicle when you are pro-
gramming remote transmitters. Another transmitter code could
be inadvertently learned by your system, allowing someone
unauthorized access to your vehicle.
n To program an additional transmitter
1. Open the drivers door.
2. Turn the vehicle ignition to the ON position.
3. Press and hold the Programming button in.
D After approximately 15 seconds, the door locks will cycle 3 times.
1-10
Doors and locks
This indicates that the system is in the Transmitter Programming

Mode. Do not release the Programming button.
4. Press the LOCK button on the new transmitter. The door locks will
cycle once.
5. Repeat step 4 for any additional transmitters. 1
6. Exit the Transmitter Program Mode by releasing the Programming
button and turning the vehicle ignition off. Test all remote transmitters
to ensure that they work properly.
n To delete a lost or stolen transmitter
1. Follow step 1 to 3 as described above.
2. Re-program the remaining transmitters as described in step 4.
D If there is only one remaining transmitter, perform step 4 four
times.
D If there are two remaining transmitters, perform step 4 twice for
each transmitter.
B System maintenance
Your keyless entry system does not require any specific maintenance
except for occasionally changing the transmitter battery. The 12-volt
battery in the remote transmitter should last approximately one year,
depending on usage. When the battery begins to weaken, you will
notice a decrease in range, or the distance from your vehicle that the
remote transmitter will operate.
n To change the remote transmitter battery
CAUTION
Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the transmitter when
replacing the battery.
CONTINUED
1-11
HS1002BA HS1003BB
1. Remove the phillips screw on the back of the remote transmitter

case. Use a small coin to separate the case halves and expose the
battery.
2. Remove the old battery and replace with type GP-23A or equiva-
lent.
3. Close the transmitter case and replace the screw.
Security system (if equipped)

B How the security system protects your vehicle
n Starter interrupt
The vehicles starter is disabled when the system is armed with your
remote transmitter.
n Passive starter interrupt (if selected)
The vehicle starter is automatically disabled one minute after the igni-
tion is turned off, even if the system has not been armed with your
remote transmitter. (This option may be activated by your SUBARU
dealer for an additional charge.)
NOTE
If the Passive Starter Interrupt Option is enabled on your system,
pay special attention to the Starter interrupt section.
1-12
Doors and locks
n All entrances protected

Opening any door or entrance protected by the security system trig-
gers the alarms 125 db siren and flashes the vehicles parking lights.
n Shock Sensor
The shock sensor detects any impact to the vehicle. Light impact will 1
cause the siren to emit a warning chirp; heavier blows will trigger
the alarm. (Shock sensor sensitivity has been preset, but may be
adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.)
n Personal protection (Panic) feature
Pressing both buttons on the remote transmitter activates the Panic
feature, sounding the siren and flashing the vehicles parking lights.
n Interior status indicator
The bright-red warning light provides a visual deterrent to a would-be
thief.
n Emergency override button
Ensures that you will be able to disarm your alarm system and start
your vehicle if your remote transmitter is lost or broken. See The
emergency override/programming button Section.
B Security system components
n The remote transmitter
The remote transmitter controls the features and options of the secu-
rity system.
HS1000CB
CONTINUED
1-13
The security system can be programmed to operate with one to four

remote transmitters. Each transmitter is powered by an internal 12-volt
alkaline battery.
n The status indicator/Valet button
HS1004BB
The Status Indicator is a high intensity warning light, located on the

dash to the left of the steering wheel. The Status Indicator displays a
visual indication of the security systems status while creating a pow-
erful theft deterrent.
LED status
Off: System is disarmed.
Double-Flash: System is in valet mode.
Steady Flash: System is armed.
Fast Flash: System has been triggered.
On: System is in pre-arm state (and will arm when all doors are
closed).
n The valet button (built into the status indicator)
The Valet Button is used to engage Valet Mode (see Valet mode
Section). In Valet Mode, the security system will not arm, through the
siren will chirp and keyless entry features will function when the secu-
rity system is disarmed.
1-14
Doors and locks
n The emergency override/programming button
HS1001BC
The Emergency Override/Programming button is used to disarm the

alarm system in case of a lost or broken transmitter. It is also used in
conjunction with the transmitter and vehicle ignition to program addi-
tional transmitters.
The Emergency Override Button is located under the drivers side
dash beneath the diagnostic connector.
B Security system operation
IMPORTANT
Security System and Keyless Entry Features Do Not Operate
when the Vehicle Ignition is on.
CONTINUED
1-15
n Arming the system
HS1000DB
To arm the system, close all doors, then press the LOCK button. The
siren will chirp twice and the parking lights will flash twice, indicat-
ing the system is armed.
The doors will also lock at this time. The status indicator will blink
steadily, once per second.
If the siren chirps and/or the parking lights flash only once, this indi-
cates that the system is in pre-arm mode. The system has detected
that a protected entrance is not secured. In pre-arm mode, the status
indicator stays on and does not blink. Check to see that all vehicle
entrances are closed securely. Once all entrances are secured, the
system will chirp/flash again, and the status indicator will blink
steadily. The system is now fully armed.
1-16
Doors and locks
n Disarming the system
HS1000EB
To disarm the system, press and release the UNLOCK button. The
siren will chirp and parking lights will flash once. The drivers door will
unlock at this time, and the vehicle interior (dome) light will turn on for
60 seconds, or until the vehicle is started.
If the siren chirps and parking lights flash four times, the system was
triggered in your absence. Refer to the Trip identification section in
this manual.
n The alarm cycle
If your alarm system is triggered, the siren will sound and the parking
lights will flash for 60 seconds. After this duration, the system will
check to see if an entrance was left open. If so, the alarm will continue
to sound. If not, the system will re-arm.
CONTINUED
1-17
n Personal protection alarm (Panic)
HS1000BC
Pressing both buttons together on the remote transmitter activates the

Panic feature, sounding the siren and flashing the parking lights.
Panic is designed to bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding
area. Press either button on the transmitter to turn off the Panic alarm.
n Disarming the security system in the event of a lost or broken
transmitter
HS1001CB
If your remote transmitter fails to operate, the system can be dis-

armed using the Emergency Override/Programming button. Follow
the procedure below:
1. Enter the vehicle. The alarm will sound when the door is opened.
2. Insert the ignition key and turn to the ON position.
1-18
Doors and locks
3. Press the Emergency Override/Programming button. The system

will disarm.
n Valet mode
HS1004CB
Valet Mode prevents the security system from arming, yet allows all
keyless entry and convenience features to function normally.
The valet button is built into the status indicator, located on the dash
to the left of the steering wheel.
To engage Valet Mode:
D With the system disarmed and the vehicle ignition off, press the
Status Indicator/Valet Button.
D The status indicator will begin to emit a quick double-flash pattern.
This indicates that the system is in Valet Mode.
D To exit Valet Mode, press the Status Indicator/Valet Button again.
The status indicator will turn off, indicating the system is in normal
operating mode.
n Trip identification
If the siren chirps four times when you disarm your security system,
this indicates that the system was triggered in your absence. Before
turning the ignition on, perform the following operation to determine
the protected zone that triggered the system.
D Open the vehicle door and press the Emergency Override/Pro-
gramming button.
CONTINUED
1-19
D The siren will emit a number of chirps. Refer to the chart (below) to

identify the violated zone.

Chirps Triggered Zone

1 Shock Sensor

2 Ignition turned on
n Starter interrupt
Door or Rear gate
Starter interrupt is an automatic procedure. The starter is disabled

any time the system is armed, or if the Passive starter interrupt fea-
ture is enabled and the passive arm time is expired. The vehicle also
will not start if power is disconnected from the alarm module.
How starter interrupt works
The alarm system interrupts the signal from the ignition key to the ve-
hicles starter when Starter interrupt is activated. If you attempt to start
the vehicle, the dash indicator will turn on as usual, but the starter will
not crank, or turn over.
Passive starter interrupt
If the Passive Starter Interrupt option has been activated by your
SUBARU dealer, the starter will be automatically disabled one minute
after you turn off the vehicle ignition, whether or not you arm the secu-
rity system with your remote transmitter.
Possible situations with starter interrupt or Passive starter inter-
rupt
If the Passive Starter Interrupt Option is enabled on your Security
System:
D If you leave the vehicle for a short amount of time, to refuel or go to
the car wash for example, always engage the Valet Mode before exit-
ing your vehicle. If you forget to engage Valet Mode, the Passive
Starter Interrupt will engage and the vehicle will not start when you
return. To enable the vehicle to start, simply press UNLOCK on
1-20
Doors and locks
your remote transmitter, or turn the vehicle ignition to the ON

position and press the Emergency Override/programming button
in and release.
D If your remote transmitter is lost or broken and the Passive Starter
Interrupt has automatically engaged, enter the vehicle, turn the igni- 1
tion to the ON position, and press the Emergency Override/pro-
gramming button. This will enable the vehicle to start.
Whether or Not the Passive Starter Interrupt Option is Activated:
D In the unlikely event of an alarm system malfunction, your vehicle
may not start. To enable the vehicle to start, press and hold the
Emergency Override/programming button, and attempt to start
the vehicle while holding the button in.
B System maintenance
Your security system does not require any specific maintenance
except for occasionally changing the transmitter battery. However, it is
suggested that the system be armed and all protected zones be
checked about once a month to make sure that they trigger an alarm
cycle.
To change the remote transmitter battery, refer to System mainte-
nance section under the heading of Keyless entry system.
B Trouble shooting guide
n If you experience any of the following situations...
D Your remote transmitter is lost or broken and your alarm sys-
tem is armed.
D You attempt to start your vehicle after pressing UNLOCK on
your remote transmitter and it does not crank.
Perform the following procedure:
1. Use your keys to enter the vehicle. (Depending on your situa-
tion, the alarm may sound when you open the door.)
2. Insert your key into the ignition and turn to the ON position.
3. Press and release the Emergency Override Button. The alarm
system will disarm and you will be able to start your vehicle.
4. If your vehicle still will not start, press and HOLD the Emer-
gency Override Button in while attempting to start your vehicle.
CONTINUED
1-21
Windows
HG0270
Turn the handle to open or close the window.
Power windows (if equipped)
WARNING
D When operating power windows, be extremely careful to pre-
vent anyones fingers or head from being caught in the window.
D Always lock the passengers windows using the lock switch
when children are riding in the vehicle.
D Before leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and never allow an unattended child to
remain in the vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure could result
in injury to a child operating the power window.
The power windows operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
1-22
Doors and locks
B Power window switch cluster (drivers side)
AUTO switch for Lock switch

drivers window
1
For rear left
For front passengers
passengers window
window
For rear right passengers

window
HG0337
Lock Unlock
Close
Close
Open
Automatically Open
open
HG0338
All door windows can be controlled by the power window switch clus-
ter at the driver side door.
n To open or close the drivers window
AUTO switch: This switch has two functions.
Push the switch down until it clicks and release it, and the window will
fully open. To stop the window halfway, pull the switch up slightly.
Push the switch down lightly and hold it. The window will open as long
as the switch is held.
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The window will close as long as
the switch is held.
CONTINUED
1-23
n To open or close the passengers windows

To open the passengers windows, push the appropriate switch down
and hold it until the window reaches the desired position. To close the
window, pull the switch up and hold it until it reaches the desired posi-
tion.
n To lock the passengers windows
To lock the passengers windows, push the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the LOCK position, the passengers windows cannot be
opened or closed.
B Passengers switches
Close
Open
HG0284
To open the window, push the switch down and hold it until the win-
dow reaches the desired position. To close the window, pull the switch
up and hold it until the window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power window switch cluster, located on
the drivers side door, is in the LOCK position, the front passengers
window cannot be operated with the front passengers switch.
1-24
Doors and locks
Trunk lid (Sedan and Coupe)
WARNING
D To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, 1
always keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
D Help prevent young children from locking themselves in the
trunk. When leaving the vehicle, either close all windows and lock
all doors or cancel the inside trunk lid release. Also make certain
that the trunk is closed.
B To open and close the trunk lid from outside
Open
OM-H0016
To open the trunk lid from outside, insert the key in the keyhole and
turn it clockwise. To close the trunk lid, lightly press the trunk lid down
until the latch engages.
CONTINUED
1-25
B To open the trunk lid from inside (vehicle with trunk lid release
lever)
HG0003
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.

n To cancel the trunk lid release
OM-H0018
The inside trunk lid release can be cancelled to help prevent unautho-
rized entry into the trunk. To cancel the trunk lid release, set the lid
release cancel lever (located on the inside of the trunk lid, mounted to
the trunk lid latch) to the CANCEL position. When this lock is in the
CANCEL position, the trunk can be opened only with the key.
1-26
Doors and locks
Rear gate (Wagon)
WARNING
To prevent dangerous exhaust gas from entering the vehicle, al- 1
ways keep the rear gate closed while driving.
Lock Unlock
OM-H0019
To unlock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it clock-
wise. To lock the rear gate, insert the key in the keyhole and turn it coun-
terclockwise. If your vehicle is equipped with power door locks, the rear
gate can also be locked and unlocked through use of the power door
lock system. Refer to the Power door locking switches section in this
chapter.
To open the rear gate, first unlock the rear gate lock then pull the outside
handle up. To close the rear gate, lower it slowly and push down firmly
until the latch engages.
CONTINUED
1-27
Fuel filler door and cap
WARNING
D Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and make sure that there are no lighted ciga-
rettes, open flames or electrical sparks in the adjacent area.
D When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. Fuel
may be under pressure and spray out of the fuel filler neck espe-
cially in hot weather, which may cause injury.
CAUTION
Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.
For choosing the right fuel for your SUBARU, refer to the Fuel require-
ments section located in chapter 7.
B To open and close the fuel filler door
HG0004
To open the fuel filler door, pull it outward. After refueling, be sure to
close the fuel filler door completely.
1-28
Doors and locks
B Fuel filler cap
CAUTION
D Make sure that the cap is tightened until it clicks to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an accident. 1
D Always use a genuine SUBARU fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have proper venting, and your fuel
tank and emission control system might be damaged.
Open Close
Cap holder
HG0046 HG0045
To take off the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise and re-
move the cap. While refueling, hang the cap on the cap holder inside
the fuel lid.
To put the cap back on, turn it clockwise until you hear a clicking
noise.
NOTE
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened until it clicks, the CHECK EN-
GINE warning light may come on. Refer to the Warning and indi-
cator lights section located in chapter 3.
B Refueling
After the fuel filler nozzle has automatically stopped, do not add any
more fuel.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface, rinse it off immediately.
Otherwise, the painted surface could be damaged. Such damage is
not covered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
CONTINUED
1-29
Engine hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open while the vehicle is moving
and block your view, which may cause an accident and serious
bodily injury.
HS0024 HG0059
HG0060
To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release knob under the instrument panel.
2. Release the secondary hood release located under the front of the
engine hood by moving the lever toward the left. Lift up the hood, release
the hood prop from its retainer and put the end of the hood prop into the
slot in the hood.
1-30
Doors and locks
To close the hood:

1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood until it approaches about 6 in. (15 cm) from the
closed position and let it drop. 1
3. After closing the hood, be sure the hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it from a slightly higher position.
Do not push the hood forcibly to close it. It could deform the metal.
Sunroof (if equipped)
WARNING
D Never let anyones hands, arms, head or any objects protrude
from the sunroof.
D Before closing the sunroof, make sure that no ones hands,
arms, head or other objects will be accidentally caught in the
sunroof.
CAUTION
D Do not sit on the edge of the open sunroof.
D Do not operate the sunroof if falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to freeze shut.
The sunroof operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
CONTINUED
1-31
OM-H0027
B To open the sunroof

Push the rear side of the switch marked Y, and the sunroof will tilt
up.
Release the switch once and push it again to slide the sunroof open.
After washing the vehicle or after there is rain, wipe away any water
on the roof prior to opening the sunroof to prevent water drops from
falling into the passenger compartment.
B To close the sunroof
Push the front side of the switch marked B, and the sunroof will
close. The sunroof will stop halfway if you continue to press on the
switch. Release the switch once and push it again to close the sun-
roof completely.
Release the switch after the sunroof has closed completely or has
tilted up. Pushing the switch continuously may cause damage to the
sunroof.
1-32
Doors and locks
J If the sunroof can not be closed
OM-H0029 OM-H0030
If the sunroof can not be closed with the sunroof switch, you can close
the roof manually.
1. Take out the hex-headed wrench and screwdriver from the tool bag.
2. Remove the plug on the roof trim by inserting the end of the regular
screwdriver between the roof and plug and plying it off.
3. Insert the wrench in the end of the motor shaft.
D To lower the sunroof, turn the wrench clockwise.
D To close the sunroof, turn the wrench counterclockwise.
Have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
CONTINUED
1-33
Roof rack (if equipped)
CAUTION
When using the roof rack, make sure that the total carrying ca-
pacity of the roof rack and luggage does not exceed the maxi-
mum load limit. Overloading may cause damage to the vehicle
and create a safety hazard.
Roof rack
HG0294
When you carry cargo on the roof using the roof rack, never exceed the
maximum load limit explained below. In addition, be careful that your ve-
hicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). See the Loading your
vehicle section in chapter 7 for information on loading cargo into or onto
your vehicle.
J When luggage is put on the slats

When putting any luggage on the slats, make sure the total weight of the
luggage on the slats does not exceed 40 lb. (18 kg). Overloading may
cause damage to the roof and create a safety hazard. Place the heaviest
load at the bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly distribute the luggage.
Always secure the luggage with straps, ropes or nets.
1-34
Doors and locks
J Installing carrying attachments on the cross bars

When installing any carrying attachment such as a bike carrier, ski carri-
er, canoe carrier, etc. on the cross bars, follow the manufacturers
instructions and make sure that the attachment is securely fixed to the
cross bars. Use only attachments designed specifically for the cross- 1
bars. A set of the cross bars is designed to carry loads (cargo and at-
tachment) of not more than 100 lb. (45 kg). Before operating the vehicle,
make sure that the cargo is properly secured on the attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicles center of gravity is altered with the
weight of the load on the roof, thus affecting the driving characteris-
tics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard cornering and abrupt stops.
Crosswind effects will be increased.
CONTINUED
1-35
Seat, seat belt and SRS airbag

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Rear seat access (Coupe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Fold down rear seat Wagon and OUTBACK SPORT . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2
Seatbelt safety tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function
(except 2-point type seatbelt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function
(except drivers and 2-point type seatbelt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Seatbelt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Fastening the seatbelt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Seatbelt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Child restraint systems ................................................. 2-20
Top tether anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ........ 2-27
Vehicle with drivers and front passengers SRS airbags
and lap/shoulder restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
SRS airbag operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
SRS airbag system monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
SRS airbag system servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Precautions against vehicle modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Front seats
WARNING
D Never adjust the seat while driving to avoid the possibility of
loss of vehicle control and of personal injury.
D Never drive the vehicle with the head restraints removed be-
cause they are designed to reduce the risk of serious neck injury
in the event that the vehicle is struck from the rear.
D Before adjusting the seat, make sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers are clear of the adjusting mechanism.
D Seat belts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-
der the seat belt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-
rious internal injury or death.
D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
D Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly re-
strained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or im-
properly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than
2-2
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For

that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seat belt, whichever is appropriate for
the childs age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward fac- 2
ing child seat) in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating
positions. For instructions and precautions concerning child re-
straint systems, see the Child restraint systems section in this
chapter.
Adjust the seatback to Adjust the seatback to

upright position. Sit well upright position. Sit
back and upright. well back and upright.
Move the seat

Move the seat as far from the as far back as
steering wheel as practical. HS0233 possible. HS0234
CONTINUED
2-3
Put children in the rear seat properly Do not recline the seatback while
restrained at all times. vehicle is moving.
HG0356 HS0247
B Fore and aft adjustment
OM-H0031 OM-H0032
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the desired position. Then
release the lever and move the seat back and forth to make sure that
it is securely locked into place.
B Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the seatback to the desired posi-
tion. Then release the lever and make sure the seatback is securely
locked into place.
2-4
B Head restraint adjustment
HS0031
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push the head re-
straint down while depressing the release button on the top of the
seatback.
OM-H2735
The best position for the head restraint is just above or level with the
top of the ears.
CONTINUED
2-5
J Rear seat access (Coupe)
CAUTION
D Never operate the reclining pedal with your fingers or with
bare feet. Doing so could result in injury to your fingers or toes.
D Never allow children to operate the reclining pedal or lever.
Their fingers or feet could be caught in the reclining mechanism,
which may result in injury.
For access to the rear seat, pull up the reclining lever at the right side of
the passengers seat cushion. The seat back will recline forward fully, al-
lowing you to access to the rear seat.
For egress from the rear seat, depress the reclining pedal at the back of
the passengers seat cushion. The seat back will recline forward fully, al-
lowing you room to exit.
Raise the seat back until it locks after access to or egress from the rear
seat and make sure that the seat back is locked in position by moving
the top of it fore and aft.
Reclining lever
Reclining pedal
OM-H0425
2-6
Rear seats
WARNING
D Seat belts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants and seatbacks or seat cushions. If 2
you do so, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback, in
the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious injury or death.
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers
in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them
from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sud-
den stop, a sudden steering or a rapid acceleration.
Sit well back and

upright.
HG0339
CONTINUED
2-7
J Fold down rear seat Wagon and OUTBACK SPORT
WARNING
D After returning the rear seat to its original position, be certain
to place all of the seat belts and the tab attached to the seat cush-
ion above the seat cushion. And make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
D Never permit anyone to ride in the cargo area.
B Folding down the seatback
OM-H0037 HG0276
Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and then fold the
seatback down.
B Folding down the seat cushion and seatback

1. Move the front seat forward.
2. Store the seat belts in the seat belt pocket to prevent them falling
below the cushion.
2-8
2
Buckle
(center seatbelt) Tongue
(center seatbelt)
OM-H0041
3. Raise the seat cushion by pulling up the tab.
OM-H0040
4. Unlock the seatback by pulling the release knob and fold the seat-
back down. Confirm that the pin located at the bottom of the seat
cushion is inserted into the slot at the top of the seatback.
CONTINUED
2-9
OM-H0042
To return the rear seat to its original position, raise the seatback and seat
cushion until they lock into place and make sure that they are securely
locked.
Make sure that the rear seat belts are not under the seat cushion or seat-
back.
2-10
Seatbelts
J Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
D All persons in the vehicle should fasten their seatbelts BE-
FORE the vehicle starts to move. Otherwise, the possibility of se- 2
rious injury becomes greater in the event of a sudden stop or ac-
cident.
D All belts should fit snugly in order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as effective in preventing or reducing
injury.
D Each seatbelt is designed to support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more persons even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious injury or death could result.
D Replace all seatbelt assemblies including retractors and at-
taching hardware worn by occupants of a vehicle that has been in
a serious accident. The entire assembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that have outgrown child restraint
devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is appropriate for
the childs height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
THE SRS AIRBAG.
CONTINUED
2-11

positions. For instructions and precautions concerning the child
restraint system, see the Child restraint systems section in this
chapter.
B Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that is suitable for your vehicle. See in-
formation on Child restraint systems in this chapter.
B Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint system, the child should sit in
the rear seat and be restrained using the seatbelts. According to ac-
cident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Never allow a
child to stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses the face or neck, move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help provide a good shoulder belt fit.
Care must be taken to securely place the lap belt as low as possible
on the hips and not on the childs waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child restraint system should be
used. Never place the shoulder belt under the childs arm or behind
the childs back.
B Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the seatbelts. They should con-
sult their doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt should be
worn securely and as low as possible over the hips, not over the
waist.
J Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) function (except

2-point type seatbelt)
The emergency locking retractor allows normal body movement but the
retractor locks automatically during a sudden stop, impact or if you pull
the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
2-12
J Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) function (except

drivers and 2-point type seatbelt)
When securing a child restraint system on the passengers seats, the
seatbelt must be changed over to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode.
When the child restraint system is removed, make sure that the retractor
2
operates as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR).
For instructions on how to convert the retractor to the ALR mode and re-
store it to the ELR mode, see the Child restraint systems section in this
chapter.
J Seatbelt warning light and chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt warning device at the drivers
seat.
This device causes the seatbelt warning light on the instrument panel to
light up for about six seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position to remind the driver to wear the seatbelt. If the drivers
seatbelt is not fastened, a warning chime sounds at the same time.
J Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
D Never use a belt that is twisted or reversed. In an accident, this
can increase the risk or severity of injury.
D Keep the lap belt as low as possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the lap belt over stronger hip
bones instead of across the weaker abdomen.
D Seatbelts provide maximum restraint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat. To reduce the risk of sliding un-
der the seatbelt in a collision, the front seatbacks should be al-
ways used in the upright position while the vehicle is running. If
the front seatbacks are not used in the upright position in a colli-
sion, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and of the lap belt slid-
ing up over the abdomen will increase, and both can result in se-
CONTINUED
2-13
rious internal injury or death.

D Do not put cushions or any other materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions. If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of lap belt sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in serious internal injury or death.
Always wear the seat- Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or
belts correctly. behind the back.
Adjust the seatback

to upright position.
Sit well back and
upright. HS0230 HS0231
Always wear the seat

belt correctly.
Sit well back and upright.
HG0358
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can become very hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn an oc-
cupant. Do not touch such hot parts until they cool.
2-14
B 3-point type seatbelt (Combination lap/shoulder belts)
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under the arm or behind the back. If
an accident occurs, this can increase the risk or severity of inju-
ry.
2
OM-H0043 OM-H0044
1. Adjust the seat position:

Drivers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position. Move the
seatback as far from the steering wheel as practical while still main-
taining full vehicle control.
Front passengers seat: Adjust the seatback to the upright position.
Move the seat as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the belt out slowly. Do not let it
get twisted. If the belt stops before reaching the buckle, return the
belt slightly and pull it out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be un-
locked, let the belt retract slightly after giving a strong pull on it, then
pull it out slowly again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. And place
the lap belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist.
CONTINUED
2-15
n Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt anchor height
WARNING
When wearing the front seatbelts, make sure the shoulder portion
of the webbing does not pass over your neck. If it does, adjust
the seatbelt anchor to a lower position. Placing the shoulder belt
over the neck may result in neck injury during sudden braking or
in a collision.
OM-H0046
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position

best suited for you.
To adjust the anchor height, pull the release knob and move the an-
chor to the desired position.
Always adjust the anchor height so that the shoulder belt passes over
the middle of the shoulder without touching the neck.
n Seatbelt guide (Coupe)
WARNING
The seatbelt guide must be in its fully raised position when the
seatbelt is worn.
Otherwise, the seatbelt will be less effective in prevailing injury in
an accident.
2-16
Before fastening the seatbelt, raise the belt guide until it stops so that
the seatbelt can be easily handled. For easy access to or egress from
the rear seat, lower the guide to the storing position.
Wear front seat

Seat belt Seat belt guide
belt with seat
guide
belt guide
fully raised up. 2
Fully
raised up
position
Starting
position
OM-H0426 HG0042
n Unfastening the seatbelt
Front Rear
Push Push
HB0303 HS0138
Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure that the belts are retracted proper-
ly to avoid catching the belt webbing in the door.
CONTINUED
2-17
B 2-point type seatbelt (lap only belts)
Too high
Keep as low on hip

bone as possible.
OM-H0048 OM-H0049
1. Sit well back in the seat and pick up the tongue plate marked
CENTER. Be careful not to twist the belt.
2. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle marked CENTER until you
hear a click. The tongue plate marked CENTER can be fastened
only into the buckle marked CENTER. If the belt is not long enough
for you, hold the tongue plate at a right angle to the belt and pull the
belt to extend.
3. To make the belt tight, pull up on the belt. And place the lap belt as
low as possible on your hips, not your waist.
n Unfastening the seatbelt
Push
OM-H0050
Push the release button on the buckle.
2-18
NOTE
When the seatbelt is not in use, store the seatbelt in the seatbelt
pocket to prevent it from being damaged.
Saet belt pocket
Buckle
(center seatbelt) Tongue
(center seatbelt)
OM-H0041
J Seatbelt maintenance
CAUTION
D Keep the belts free of polishes, oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
D Never attempt to make modifications or changes that will pre-
vent the seatbelt from operating properly.
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap and lukewarm water. Never
bleach or dye the belts because this could seriously affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments including the webbing and all
hardware periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears, damage, loose
bolts or worn areas. Replace the seatbelts even if only minor damage is
found.
CONTINUED
2-19
Child restraint systems
WARNING
D Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision, because the child will be caught between the
passenger and objects inside the vehicle. Additionally, holding a
child in your lap or arms in the front seat exposes that child to
another serious danger. Since the SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force, the child could be injured or even
killed.
that reason, be sure to secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats
at all times. You should choose a restraint device which is
appropriate for the childs age, height and weight. According to
accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
D SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGERS
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD
SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SE-
RIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat at all
times. Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front
passengers seat. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable
force and can injure or even kill the child.
2-20
Never hold a child on your lap or in

Secure child restraint devices in the
your arms in the front passengers
REAR seats at all times.
seat or any other seat.
HS0229 OM-H0051
Never install rearward facing child Never allow a child to stand up, or to
seat in the front passengers seat. kneel on the front passengers seat
or any other seat.
HS0042 HS0228
WARNING
D Child restraint systems and seat belts can become hot in a ve-
hicle that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn
a small child. Check the child restraint system before you place a
child in it.
D Do not leave an unsecured child restraint system in your vehi-
cle. Unsecured child restraint systems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden stop, turn or accident; it can strike
and injure vehicle occupants as well as result in serious injuries
or death to the child.
CONTINUED
2-21
Infants and small children should always be placed in an infant or child

restraint system in the rear seat while riding in the vehicle. You should
use an infant or child restraint system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is compat-
ible with your vehicle and is appropriate for the childs age and size. All
child restraint systems are designed to be secured in the vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
Children could be endangered in an accident if their child restraints are
not properly secured in the vehicle. When installing the child restraint
system, carefully follow the manufacturers instructions.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child restraint system at all times
while the vehicle is moving.
B Installing child restraint systems in the 2-point type seat belt
position (Rear center seating position)
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufactur-
ers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in posi-
tion. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in-
creased.
2-22
HS2002BA
1. Set the child restraint system in the center seating position.

2. Run the 2-point type seat belt through or around the child restraint
system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.
4. Tighten the seat belt.
5. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, move it back
and forth to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint
can be more firmly srcured by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
If the child restraint system requires a top tether, latch the hook onto
the top tether anchor and tighten the top tether. See Top tether an-
chorages for additional instructions.
6. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on
the seatbelt buckle.
B Installing child restraint systems in the 3-point type seat belt
position
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint system, follow the manufactur-
ers instructions supplied with it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure that it is held securely in posi-
tion. If it is not held tight and secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the event of an accident may be in-
creased.
CONTINUED
2-23
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no longer in use, remove it and
restore the ELR function of the retractor. That function is restored
by allowing the seat belt to retract fully.
HGS021BA
1. Set the child restraint system in the seating position.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belts through or around the child re-
straint system following the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the childs face or neck, put it be-
hind the child restraint system.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seat belt fully from the retractor to change the retractor
over from the Emergency Locking Retractor(ELR) to the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, clicks will be heard which indi-
cate the retractor functions as ALR.
6. Before having a child sit in the child restraint system, move it back
and forth to check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a child restraint
can be more firmly secured by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seat belt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt to confirm that it cannot be
pulled out (ALR properly functioning).
If the child restraint system requires a top tether, latch the hook onto the
top tether anchor and tighten the top tether. See Top tether anchorages
2-24
for additional instructions.
HG0188 HGS022BA
8. To remove the child restraint system, press the release button on

the seatbelt buckle and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt
will return to the ELR mode.
J Top tether anchorages

B Anchorage location
HG2004BB HG2005BB
Three anchorages, i.e., ones for the right, center and left positions,
are already installed on the rear parcel shelf (on coupe and sedan) or
on the back wall of the cargo area (on station wagon and OUTBACK
SPORT).
CONTINUED
2-25
B To hook the top tether
Coupe and sedan
Top tether hook
OM-H0396
Wagon and OUTBACK SPORT

Center anchorage Left and right anchorage
Top tether hook
OM-H0450 HG2003BC
Fasten the top tether hook of the child restraint to the appropriate an-
chorage.
Tighten the top tether securely.
2-26
*SRS airbag
(Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used
because the airbag system supplements the vehicles seatbelts.
J Vehicle with drivers and front passengers SRS air- 2

bags and lap/shoulder restraint
WARNING
D To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection provided by the
seatbelt. It does not do away with the need to fasten seatbelts. In
combination with the seatbelts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the car has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seatbelt system,
see the Seatbelts sections in this chapter.
D Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Be-
cause the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed faster
than the blink of an eye and force to protect in high speed colli-
sions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body
is too close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in
proper position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident
braking.
Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deploy-
ment force.
CONTINUED
2-27
D Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could
be propelled inside the car and cause injury.
Adjust the seatback to Adjust the seatback to

upright position. Sit well upright position. Sit
back and upright. well back and upright.
Move the seat

Move the seat as far from the as far back as
steering wheel as practical. HS0233 possible. HB0290
WARNING
adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recommend that ALL children (in-
cluding those in child seats and those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device or in a seatbelt, whichever is ap-
2-28
propriate for the childs age, height and weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
positions.
For instructions and precautions concerning the child restraint 2
system, see the Child restraint systems section in this chapter.
D NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
THE SRS AIRBAG.
D Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front pas-
sengers seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms.
The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
Put children in the REAR seat prop- Never install rearward facing child
erly restrained at all times. seat in the front passengers seat.
HB0291 HB0306
CONTINUED
2-29
Never allow a child to stand up, or Never hold a child on your lap or in
to kneel on the front passengers your arms.
seat
HB0307 HB0308
WARNING
D Do not put any objects over the steering wheel pad and dash-
board. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could interfere
with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehi-
cle and cause injury.
D Do not attach accessories to the windshield, or fit an extra-
wide mirror over the rear view mirror. If the SRS airbag deploys,
those objects could become projectiles that could seriously in-
jure vehicle occupants.
Do not put any objects over the Do not attach accessories to the
steering wheel pad and dashboard windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the rear view mirror.
HS0244 HS0245
2-30
CAUTION
D When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your pas-
sengers have breathing problems after SRS airbag deploys, get
fresh air promptly.
D A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get 2
burnt if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.
The supplemental restraint system (SRS) consists of two airbags (drivers

and front passengers SRS airbags).
These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the prima-
ry protection provided by the seatbelt.
The drivers SRS airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering
wheel. The passengers SRS airbag is stowed near the top of the dash-
board under an SRS AIRBAG mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the drivers and front passen-
gers SRS airbags deploy and supplement the seatbelts by reducing the
impact on the drivers and front passengers head and chest.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that
it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting him to the applicable
section in this owners manual.
CONTINUED
2-31
B Components
SRS airbag module

(Drivers side)
Front sub sensor
(Right hand side)
SRS airbag module
Front sub sensor (Passengers side)
(Left hand side)
SRS airbag control module

(including impact sensors)
HG0287
J SRS airbag operation
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the
steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deploy-
ment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
2-32
Drivers side Passengers side
SRS airbags
deploy as soon as
a collision occurs.
2
After deployment,
SRS airbags start
to deflate immedi-
ately so that the
drivers vision is not
obstructed.
OM-H0384
The SRS airbag can function only when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
If the front sub sensors inside the both front fenders and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module detect a certain predetermined
amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends
signals to the airbag modules instructing them to inflate the SRS air-
bags. Then both airbag modules produce gas, which instantly inflates
drivers and passengers SRS airbags. After the deployment, the SRS
airbags immediately start to deflate so that the drivers vision is not
obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the deflating
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye.
The front passengers SRS airbag deploys together with drivers SRS
airbag even when no one occupies the front passengers seat.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a
non-accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate
quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the drivers
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will
be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are
CONTINUED
2-33
normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in
the vehicle.
The SRS airbag is designed to deploy in the event of an accident in-
volving a moderate to severe frontal collision. It is basically not de-
signed to deploy in lesser frontal impacts because the necessary
protection can be achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, it is basically
not designed to deploy in side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
dents because deployment of the SRS airbag would not help the oc-
cupant in those situations.
The SRS airbag is designed to function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in
the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from
one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the
visible damage done to the vehicle itself.
n Examples of accident in which the SRS airbag will most likely
deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speed of
12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) activates the SRS airbag. The SRS air-
bag will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal im-
pact similar in fashion and magnitude to the above-mentioned colli-
sion.
HG2000BA
2-34
n Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that

the SRS airbag will deploy.
The SRS airbag may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard
impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when
the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely bumped or knocked
hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).
2
HG2001BA HG2002BA
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS airbag is

unlikely to deploy.
There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require
SRS airbag deployment. If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole, or if it slides under a trucks load bed, or
if it sustains an oblique offset frontal impact, the SRS airbag may not
deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.
The vehicle strikes a tele- The vehicle slides under a The vehicle sustains an
phone pole or similar ob- trucks load bed. oblique offset frontal im-
ject. pact.
HG0288 HG0289 HG0290
CONTINUED
2-35
n Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS airbag

will basically not deploy.
The SRS airbag is basically not designed to deploy if the vehicle is
struck from side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it
is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.
The vehicle is struck from The vehicle is struck from The vehicle rolls onto its
behind. the side. side or roof.
HG0291 HG0292 HG0293
In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the

SRS airbag deploys only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision, first with another vehicle,
then against a concrete wall in immediate succession, the SRS airbag
is activated on the first impact but not on the second.
HB1070BB
2-36
J SRS airbag system monitors
SRS airbag system warning light
HG0341
A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS air-

bag system while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS airbag system
warning light AIRBAG will show normal system operation by lighting for
about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
The following components are monitored by the indicator:
D Front sub sensor (Right hand side)
D Front sub sensor (Left hand side)
D Airbag control module (including impact sensors)
D Airbag module (Drivers side)
D Airbag module (Passengers side)
D All related wiring
In the event of a malfunction indicated by any of following, the vehicle
should be taken promptly to your nearest SUBARU dealer to have the
system checked. Unless checked and repaired, the SRS airbags will not
function reliably:
D Flashing or flickering of the indicator light.
D No illumination of the warning light when the ignition switch is first
turned to the ON position.
D Continuous illumination of the warning light.
D Illumination of the warning light while driving.
CONTINUED
2-37
J SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
D When discarding an airbag module or scrapping the entire car
damaged by a collision, consult your SUBARU dealer.
D The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your near-
est SUBARU dealer. Tampering with or disconnecting the sys-
tems wiring could result in accidental inflation of the SRS airbag
or could make the system inoperative, which may result in seri-
ous injury. The wiring harnesses of the SRS airbag system are
covered with yellow insulation and the system connectors are
yellow for easy identification.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas listed below, we recommend
that you have an authorized SUBARU dealer perform the work. The
SRS airbag control module, impact sensors and airbag modules
are stored in these areas.
D Under the center console
D Inside each front fender
D Steering wheel and column and nearby areas
D Top of the dashboard on front passengers side and nearby
areas
In the event that the SRS airbag is deployed, replacement of the sys-
tem should be performed only by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
When the components of the SRS airbag system are replaced, use
only genuine SUBARU parts.
To ensure their long-term reliability, the SRS airbags must be inspected
by a SUBARU dealer ten years after the date of manufacture, which is
shown on the certification label attached to the drivers door.
2-38
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
D The front part of the vehicle was involved in an accident in
which the SRS airbags did not deploy.
D The pad section of the steering wheel or front passengers air-
bag cover is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged. 2
J Precautions against vehicle modification
WARNING
D To avoid accidental activation of the system or rendering the
system inoperative, which may result in serious injury, no modifi-
cations should be made to any components or wiring of the SRS
airbag system.
This includes following modifications:
D Installation of custom steering wheel
D Attachment of additional trim materials to the dashboard
D Installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment such
as a mobile two-way radio on or near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring is not advisable. This could interfere
with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following modifications. Such modifica-
tions can interfere with proper operation of the SRS airbag system.
D Attachment of any equipment (brush bar, winches, snow
plow, skid plate, etc.) other than SUBARU genuine accessory
parts to the front end
D Modification of the suspension system or front end structure
D Installation of a tire of different size and construction from
the tires specified on the tire placard attached to the door jamb
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if you want to install any accessory
parts to your vehicle.
CONTINUED
2-39
Instruments and controls

Gauges ....................................................................... 3-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Odometer/Trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Tachometer (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3
SRS airbag system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . 3-7
ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (for AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door open warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Front-wheel drive warning light (for AWD AT vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Turn signal indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
High beam indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Light control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Illumination brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Parking light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Fog light switch (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Windshield wipers and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Gauges
HG3001AA
J Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed.
J Odometer/Trip meter
Tripmeter
Odometer
HG0296
This meter displays the odometer and trip meter when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
To change the mode indication, briefly push the knob.
The odometer shows the total distance that the vehicle has been driven.
The trip meter shows the distance that the vehicle has been driven since
you last set it to zero.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the indication of the trip meter by
3-2
pushing the knob and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE
If the connection between the combination meter and battery is bro-
ken for any reason such as vehicle maintenance or fuse replace-
ment, the data recorded on the trip meter will be lost.
J Tachometer (if equipped)

3
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the pointer of the tachometer in
the red zone. In this range, fuel injection will be cut by the engine
control module to protect the engine from overrevving. The en-
gine will resume running normally after the engine speed is re-
duced below the red zone.
The tachometer shows the engine speed in thousands of revolutions per

minute.
J Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
tank.
The gauge does not return to E even though the ignition switch is in the
ACC or LOCK position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel movement in the tank.
CONTINUED
3-3
J Temperature gauge
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
See In case of emergency in this manual.
Normal
operating
range
HG0297
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.
The coolant temperature will vary in accordance with the outside temper-
ature and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately until the pointer of the temper-
ature gauge reaches near the middle of the range. Engine operation is
optimum with the engine coolant at this temperature range and high rev-
ving operation when the engine is not warmed up enough should be
avoided.
3-4
Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lights come on momentarily and
then go out when the ignition switch is initially turned to the ON posi-
tion. This permits checking the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
The following lights come on:
Seat belt warning light
SRS airbag system warning light 3
Charge warning light
Oil pressure warning light
Brake system warning light
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator lamp
ABS warning light (if equipped)
AT OIL TEMPerature warning light (if equipped)
If any lights fail to come on, it indicates a burned-out bulb or a malfunc-
tion of the corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer for repair.
J Seat belt warning light and chime

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the seat belt
warning light will come on and the reminder chime will sound to remind
driver to fasten the seat belt.
The seat belt warning light will remain on for about six seconds and turn
off automatically after six seconds.
The seat belt reminder chime will turn off when the drivers side seat belt
is buckled or it will turn off automatically after six seconds.
J SRS airbag system warning light AIRBAG

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SRS airbag
warning light will come on for about six seconds and go out. This shows
the SRS airbag is in normal operation.
If this light comes on while driving or remains illuminated even after a
period of about 6 seconds from when the ignition has been turned on, it
may indicate that the SRS airbag system is not working properly.
CONTINUED
3-5
Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
J Charge warning light

If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
charging system is not working properly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the alterna-
tor belt. If the belt is loose, broken or if the belt is in good condition but
the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU dealer immediately.
J Oil pressure warning light
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the oil pressure warning light on.
This may cause serious engine damage.
If this light comes on when the engine is running, it may indicate that the
engine oil pressure is low and the lubricating system is not working prop-
erly.
If the light comes on while driving or does not go out after the engine
starts, stop the engine at the first safe opportunity and check the engine
oil level. If the oil level is low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is at
the proper level but the light remains on, contact your nearest SUBARU
dealer immediately.
BRAKE (US)
J Brake system warning light (Canada)
WARNING
D Driving with the brake system warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system may not be working properly. If
the light remains on, have the brakes inspected by a SUBARU
dealer immediately.
D If at all in doubt about whether the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle. Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
3-6
This light has the following two functions:

B Parking brake warning
The light comes on with the parking brake applied while the ignition
switch is in the ON position. It goes out when the parking brake is
fully released.
B Brake fluid level warning
This light comes on when the brake fluid level drops to near the MIN
level of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition switch in the ON
position and with the parking brake fully released. 3
If the brake system warning light should come on while driving with
the parking brake lever fully released, it could be an indication of
leaking of brake fluid or worn brake pads. In such a case, have your
vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer immediately.
J CHECK ENGINE warning light/

Malfunction indicator lamp
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light comes on while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by your SUBARU dealer as soon
as possible. Continued vehicle operation without having the
emission control system checked and repaired as necessary
could cause serious damage, which may not be covered by your
vehicles warranty.
If this light comes on steadily or blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate that there is a problem or potential problem somewhere in the
emission control system.
B If the light comes on steadily:
If the light comes on steadily while driving or does not go out after the
engine starts, an emission control system malfunction has been de-
tected.
You should have your vehicle checked by an authorized SUBARU
dealer immediately.
CONTINUED
3-7
NOTE
This light also comes on when the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks. If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the
cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator
lamp coming on could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it clicks. Make sure nothing
is interfering with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the cap will
not make the CHECK ENGINE warning light turn off immediately.
It may take several driving trips. If the light does not go out, take
your vehicle to your authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
B If the light is blinking:
If the light is blinking while driving, an engine misfire condition has
been detected which may damage the emission control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emission control system, you
should do the following:
D Reduce vehicle speed.
D Avoid hard acceleration.
D Avoid steep uphill grades.
D Reduce the amount of cargo, if possible.
D Stop towing a trailer as soon as possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may stop blinking and come on
steadily after several driving trips. You should have your vehicle
checked by an authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
(U.S.)
J ABS warning light (for vehicles with ABS) ABS (Canada)
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position and goes out after about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not
work properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; how-
ever, the conventional brake system continues to operate nor-
3-8
mally.
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 8 mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available
opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
3
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as shown below, the ABS system
may be considered normal.
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started but
goes out immediately, remaining off.
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been started,
but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8 mph (12
km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out
immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due to
the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When the
battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
J AT OIL TEMPerature warning light

(for AT vehicles)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-
tion and goes out after about two seconds. If this light comes on when
the engine is running, it may indicate that the automatic transmission
fluid temperature is too hot.
Even if the light comes on while driving, it is unnecessary to stop the ve-
hicle. But avoid driving up steep grades or driving in stop and go traffic.
CONTINUED
3-9
B Automatic transmission control system warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts, it may indicate that the auto-
matic transmission control system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service immediately.
J Door open warning lights

The door open warning light comes on if any door or the rear gate (for
wagon and OUTBACK SPORT) is not fully closed.
Always make sure this light is out before you start to drive.
J Front-wheel drive warning light

(for AWD AT vehicles)
This light comes on when All Wheel Drive is disengaged and the drive
mechanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive for maintenance or similar
purposes.
J Turn signal indicator lights

These lights show the operation of the turn signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink rapidly, the turn signal bulb
may be burned out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible. Refer to Re-
placing bulbs section in chapter 10.
J High beam indicator

This light shows that the headlights are in the high beam mode.
This indicator light also comes on when operating headlight flasher.
J Low fuel warning light

The low fuel warning light comes on when the tank is nearly empty
(about 2.3 U.S. gal., 9.0 liters, 1.9 Imp. gal.). It only operates when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
NOTE
This light does not go out unless the tank is replenished up to an
internal fuel quantity of about 3.6 U.S. gal. (14 liters, 3.0 Imp. gal.).
3-10
Clock
HG3002AA
The clock displays the time when the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON positions.
B Setting the clock
Each time the + button is pressed, the clock gains 1 minute. By
holding the button depressed, the clock can be put forward continu-
ously. Pressing the button puts the clock rearward.
Hazard warning flasher
HS0053
The hazard warning flasher is used to warn other drivers when you have
to park your vehicle under emergency conditions. The hazard warning
CONTINUED
3-11
flasher works with the ignition switch in any position.

When you have to park your vehicle under emergency conditions, pull off
the road safely and park away from the traffic if it is possible.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher, push the hazard warning button
on the instrument panel. To turn off the flasher, push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
Light control switch
WARNING
To prevent battery discharge resulting from accidentally leaving
your lights on when your vehicle is parked, the light switch oper-
ates only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. In any
other position, the vehicles lights will be out.
If you park vehicle on a roadside at night, use the hazard warning
flasher to alert the other drivers.
Dimmer
Headlight flasher
HS0054 HS0055
The light switch operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
B Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on the end of the turn signal
3-12
lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights, side marker
lights and license plate light are on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument panel illumination, tail lights,
side marker lights and license plate light are on.
B High/low beam change (dimmer) 3
To change from low beam to high beam, push the turn signal lever
forward. When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indi-
cator light a on the instrment panel is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever back to the detent position.
B Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing position for more than just a
few seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever toward you and then release it.
The high beam will stay on for as long as you hold the lever. The
headlight flasher works even though the lighting switch is in the OFF
position.
When the headlights are on high beam, the high beam indicator light
a on the instrment panel also comes on.
B Daytime running light system (for CANADA models)
WARNING
The tail lights, parking lights, and side marker lights are not
turned on by the daytime running light system. The light switch
must always be turned to the a position when it is dark out-
side.
CONTINUED
3-13
The low beam headlights will automatically come on at reduced

brightness when the engine has started, under the following condi-
tions:
D The parking brake is fully released.
D The automatic transmission selector lever is set at other than
the P position.
D The light switch is in the OFF position.
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn HS0056
To activate the right turn signal, push the turn signal lever up. To activate
the left turn signal, push the turn signal lever down. When the turn is fin-
ished, the lever will return automatically. If the lever does not return after
cornering, return the lever to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn signal lever up or down slightly
and hold it during the lane change. The turn signal indicator lights will
flash in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever will return auto-
matically to the neutral position when you release it.
3-14
Illumination brightness control
Brighten
Darken
HS0057
When the lighting switch is in the p or a position, you can adjust

brightness of the instrument panel illumination for better visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial counterclockwise.
To darken, turn the control dial clockwise.
Parking light switch
HS0058
The parking light switch operates regardless of the ignition switch posi-
tion.
By pushing the front end of this switch, following lights will come on.
parking lights
CONTINUED
3-15
front and rear side marker lights

tail lights
license plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the parking light switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long time because that will run down
the battery.
Fog light switch (if equipped)

The fog lights operate only when the headlights are on low beam.
Push the switch to turn the fog lights on. To turn them off, push the switch
again.
HB2025BB
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the windshield washer until the
windshield is sufficiently warmed by the defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
3-16
CAUTION
D Do not operate the washer continuously for more than ten se-
conds, or when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor. Check the washer fluid level fre-
quently, such as at fuel stops.
D Do not operate the wipers when the windshield or rear window
is dry. This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on
a dry windshield or rear window, always use the windshield 3
washer.
D In freezing weather, be sure that the wiper blades are not fro-
zen to the windshield or rear window before switching on the
wipers. Attempting to operate the wiper with the blades frozen to
the window glass could cause not only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper motor to burn out. If the wiper blade
is frozen to the window glass, be sure to operate the defroster or
rear window defogger before turning on the wiper.
D If the wipers stop during operation because of ice or some oth-
er obstruction on the window, the wiper motor could burn out
even if the wiper switch is turned off. If this occurs, promptly stop
the vehicle in a safe place, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and clean the window glass to allow proper wiper opera-
tion.
D Use clean water if windshield washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent. (See Windshield washer fluid
section in chapter 10.)
Also, when driving the vehicle when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wiper blades.
D Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
CONTINUED
3-17
NOTE
D The wiper operates only when the ignition switch is in the ON
or ACC position.
D Clean your wiper blades and window glass periodically with a
washer solution to prevent streaking, and to remove accumulations
of road salt or road film. Keep the washer button depressed at least
for 1 second so that washer solution will be sprinkled all over the
windshield or rear window.
D Grease, wax, insects or other material on the windshield or the
wiper blades results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove those streaks after operating the
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of
the windshield or rear window and the wiper blades using a sponge
or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the window glass and wiper blades with clean water.
The glass is clean if no beads form on the glass when you rinse with
water.
D If you cannot eliminate the streaking even after following this pro-
cedure, replace the wiper blades with new ones. Refer to the Wiper
blade replacement section (chapter 10) for replacement instruc-
tions.
J Windshield wiper and washer switches

B Windshield wipers
HB2019BB
3-18
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper control lever down.
: Intermittent
LO : Low speed
HI : High speed
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to the OFF position.
B Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the lever toward you. The wipers
operate until you release the lever.
3
B Washer
HB2020BA
To wash the windshield, push the washer button at the end of the wip-
er control lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release the washer
button. The wipers operate while you push the button.
CONTINUED
3-19
J Rear window wiper and washer switch (if equipped)
HB2021BA
B Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on the end of the wiper control
lever to the ON position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on the end of the lever to the
OFF position.
B Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear wiper is operating, turn the
knob on the end of the wiper control lever counterclockwise to the
position. The washer fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is not in use, turn the
knob on the end of the wiper control lever clockwise to the
position. The washer fluid sprays and the wiper operates until you re-
lease the knob.
3-20
Rear window defogger switch
CAUTION
D Do not use sharp instruments or window cleaner containing
abrasives to clean the inner surface of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed on the window.
D To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate
the defogger continuously for any longer than necessary.
3
The rear window defogger operates only when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
Indicator light
HS0063
To turn on the defogger, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
The indicator light located on the switch lights up while the rear window
defogger is operating.
The defogger will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. If the win-
dow clears before that time, push the switch to turn it off. It also turns off
when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. If
defrosting or defogging is desired when you restart your vehicle, you
have to push the switch to turn it on again.
CONTINUED
3-21
Horn
OM-H0440
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside mirrors are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
J Inside mirror
HG0019
The inside mirror has a day and night position. Pull the tab at the bottom
of the mirror toward you for the night position. Push it away for the day
position. The night position reduces glare from headlights.
3-22
J Outside mirrors
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex mirror (passenger side) and far-
ther away than when viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use the con-
vex mirror to judge the distances of vehicles behind you when
changing lanes. Use the inside mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and distance of objects that you view in
the convex mirror. 3
OM-H0080
B Adjusting mirrors
To adjust the mirrors by hand, push where indicated by the arrows.
OM-H0081
CONTINUED
3-23
B Remote control mirror switch (if equipped)

The remote control mirrors operate only when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position.
Direction control knob
Selection switch
HG0344
1. Press either end of the selection switch; L for the left and R for
the right.
2. Move the direction control knob in the direction you want to move
the mirror.
3. Return the selection switch to the neutral position to prevent
unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.
3-24
Climate control
Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Air filtration system (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4
Ventilator
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or

right and left to adjust the air flow direction
Oepn
Close
Move the thumb-wheel up and down or
right and left to adjust the air flow direction
Oepn
Close
Move the thumb-wheel
up and down or right
and left to adjust the
air flow direction
HS0070
4-2
Climate control
Heating and air conditioning
Temperature Air inlet selec- Air outlet

control dial tion lever control dial
Fan speed Air conditioner 4

control lever button HS0071
B Air outlet control dial

This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel outlets and the foot
outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and some through the wind-
shield defroster outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets and foot
outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield defroster outlets.
B Temperature control dial

This dial regulates the hot air flow from the heater over a range from
the blue area (cool) to red area (warm).
B Fan speed control lever
The fan operates only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. The fan speed control lever is used to select four fan
speeds.
CONTINUED
4-3
B Air inlet selection lever
WARNING
Continued operaton in the position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the position as soon as the outside
dusty condition clears.
: Interior air is recirculated inside the passenger comparment.

: Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment.
B Air conditioner button (if equipped)
The air conditioner operates only when the engine is running.
Push the air conditioner button while the fan is in operation to turn on
the air conditioner. The indicator light will come on.
Push it again to turn off the air conditioner.
J Heater operation
B Defrosting or defogging the windshield
HS0072 HS0073
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the position.
2. Set the air outlet control dial to the position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial all the way right.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the highest speed.
4-4
Climate control
Warm air also comes out from the right and left air outlets. To stop
warm air flow from these outlets, turn the corresponding thumb-wheel
to the position.
B Heating and defrosting
HS0074 HS0075
To direct warm air toward the floor and the windshield:

3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.
4. Set the fan speed control lever to the desired speed.
to the position.
CONTINUED
4-5
B Heating
HS0076 HS0077
To direct warm air toward the floor:

1. Set the air inlet selection lever to the position
2 Set the air outlet control dial to the position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the most comfortable level.
to the position.
B Bi-level heating
HS0078 HS0079
This setting allows you to direct air of different temperatures from the
instrument panel and outlets. The air from the foot outlets is slightly
4-6
Climate control
warmer than from the instrument panel outlet.

3. Set the temperature control dial to the desired temperature level.
Setting the temperature control dial fully turned to the red area or blue
area decreases the temperature difference between the air from the
instrument panel outlets and the air from the foot outlets.
B Ventilation
4
WARNING
Continued operaton in the position may fog up the win-
dows. Switch to the position as soon as the outside
dusty condition clears.
HS0080 HS0081
To force outside air through the instrument panel outlets:

3. Set the temperature control dial all the way left.
When driving on a dusty road, set the air inlet control lever to the
position.
CONTINUED
4-7
J Air conditioner operation

B Cooling or dehumidifying
ON position
HS0082 HS0081
For cooling and dehumidification of the passenger compartment, air

flows through the instrument panel outlets:
3. Push the air conditioner button on.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the blue area.
5. Set the fan speed control lever at the highest speed.
B Defrosting or defogging
CAUTION
The air conditioner compressor will not cycle on automatically
when set the air outlet control dial to the position. In
order to take advantage of the air conditioning systems ability to
dehumidify the air in the passenger compartment, it is also nec-
essary to depress the air conditioner button.
4-8
Climate control
ON position
HS0072 HS0073
4
To direct warm air to the windshield and front door windows:
3. Push the air conditioner button on.
4. Set the temperature control dial to the red area.
5. Set the fan speed control lever at the highest speed.
Operating tips for heater and air conditioner

B Cleaning ventilator grille
Ventilator inlet grille
HG0083
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free of snow, leaves, or oth-
er obstructions to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. Since the
condenser is located in front of the radiator, this area should be kept
CONTINUED
4-9
clean because cooling performance is impaired by any accumulation

of insects and leaves on the condenser.
B Efficient cooling after parking in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with the windows open for a few
minutes to allow outside air to circulate into the heated interior. This re-
sults in quicker cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the windows
closed during the operation of the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
B Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at a low engine speed (at idle
or low driving speeds) a few minutes each month during the off-sea-
son to circulate its oil.
B Checking air conditioning system before summer season
Check the air conditioner unit for refrigerant leaks, hose conditions,
and proper operation each spring. This check is best performed by
your SUBARU dealer.
B Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and low tempera-
ture weather condition
Under certain weather conditions (high relative humidity, low tempera-
tures, etc.) a small amount of water vapor emission from the air outlets
may be noticed during cooling or dehumidifying. This condition is nor-
mal and does not indicate any problem with the air conditioning sys-
tem.
B Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine is heavily
loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage, the air conditioner com-
pressor is designed to temporarily shut off during air conditioner op-
eration whenever the accelerator is fully depressed. Such as during
rapid acceleration or when driving on a steep upgrade.
B Refrigerant for your climate control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly refrigerant HFC134a. There-
fore, the method of adding, changing or checking the refrigerant is
different from the method for CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
4-10
Climate control
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a result of using the wrong re-
frigerant are not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system (if equipped)

If your vehicles air conditioning system is equipped with a optional air
filtration system, replace the filter element according to the replacement
schedule shown below. This schedule should be followed to maintain the
filters dust collection ability. Under extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Since the filter element is a viscous
type, it is unnecessary to clean or wash the element. It is recommended 4
that you have your filter checked or replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
For replacement, use only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 12 months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever comes first
NOTE
The filter can influence the air conditioning, heating and defroster
performance.
B Replacement procedure
Cooling unit
Filter cover Old filter

and rubber Screws
seal
HS0253 HS0254
1. Remove the filter cover by removing the two (2) screws.

2. Remove the old filter.
CONTINUED
4-11
Cooling unit
Rubber seal
Plastic tab
Filter cover
New filter
Screws
HS0255 HS0256
3. Insert a new filter with the plastic tab facing forward.

4. Install rubber seal on the duct opening.
CAUTION
Make certain that the rubber seal is evenly seated on the duct
opening.
5. Install the filter cover and secure with two (2) screws.
Center pillar
Caution label
Change label
HS0257
6. Fill out information on the small label supplied with the filter kit.
7. Attach small and large labels on the lower part of the center pillar.
4-12
Audio
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
FM reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
AM/FM stereo radio with cassette player (if equipped) ...... 5-3
Radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Cassette player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Installation of accessories ............................................ 5-12
5
Radio
J Antenna
Before listening to the radio, extend the antenna to its full length for bet-
ter reception and reproduction quality.
OM-H0115
J FM reception
Although FM is normally static free, reception can be affected by the sur-
rounding area, atmospheric conditions, station strength and transmitter
distance. Buildings or other obstructions may cause momentary static,
flutter or station interference. If reception continues to be unsatisfactory,
switch to a stronger station.
5-2
Audio
AM/FM stereo radio with cassette player

(if equipped)
The radio will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON positions.
Radio operation
Stereo Waveband indicator

indicator
Press station Frequency DISP button

number 5
SCAN
button Tuning buttons
Tone and balance Power switch and Preset buttons FM/AM selection
control button volume control switch
HG0084
CONTINUED
5-3
J Power switch and volume control (ON/VOL)

When the volume level is set
Volume control at the level 18:
Power ON/OFF
HS0086 HS0087
The knob is used for both power (on/off) and volume control. The radio is
turned on and off by pushing the knob and the volume is controlled by
turning the knob.
The volume control has total of 34 volume levels (V: 0 for minimum, V: 33
for maximum).
J Tone and balance control (TONE/BAL)

The volume control knob normally function as volume control. This knob
becomes a control for Bass, Treble, Fader or Balance when you select
the appropriate tone and balance control mode.
The T/B (Tone and balance) button is used for selecting the following
control modes:
Bass (low note) control
Treble (high note) control
Fader control (Volume balance control between front and rear
speakers)
Balance control (Volume balance control between right and left
speakers)
To change control modes: Each brief press of the T/B button
changes control modes in the following sequence starting from volume
control mode. (When the radio is first turned on, the control mode is in
the volume control.)
5-4
Audio
Volume Bass Treble Fader Balance

(VOL) (BAS) (TRE) (FAD) (BAL)
B Bass control
Bass volume control indication When the bass volume level is set at
the level +6
HG0085 HG0086
Select the Bass control mode by pressing the T/B button. In the
bass control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.
The bass control has total of 13 volume levels (B: 6 for minimum, 0
for middle, B: +6 for maximum). Choose desired bass volume level by
turning the volume control knob. The control function returns to vol-
ume control mode after about 5 seconds.
B Treble control
Treble volume control indication When the treble volume level is set
at the level 6
HG0087 HG0088
CONTINUED
5-5
Select the Treble control mode by pressing the T/B button. In the
treble control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.
The treble control has total of 13 volume levels (TR: 6 for minimum, 0
for middle, TR: +6 for maximum). Choose desired treble volume level
by turning the volume control knob. The control function returns to vol-
ume control mode after about 5 seconds.
B Fader control
Fader control indication When the fader setting is at the F12

(front maximum and rear minimum)
HG0089 HG0090
Select the Fader control mode by pressing the T/B button. In the
fader control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.
The fader control has total of 25 settings (F: 12 for front maximum and
rear minimum, 0 for neutral, R: 12 for front minimum and rear maxi-
mum). Choose desired setting by turning the volume control knob.
The control function returns to volume control mode after about 5 se-
conds.
5-6
Audio
B Balance control
Balance control indication When the balance setting is at the L12

(left side maximum and right side mini-
mum)
HG0091 HG0092
Select the Balance control mode by pressing the T/B button. In the
5
balance control mode, the display shows the indication as shown.
The balance control has total of 25 settings (L: 12 for left side maxi-
mum and right side minimum, 0 for neutral, R: 12 for left side mini-
mum and right side maximum). Choose desired setting by turning the
volume control knob. The control function returns to volume control
mode after about 5 seconds.
J FM/AM selection switch

Use this switch to select either FM or AM reception. The display indi-
cates which one is currently selected.
J Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator ST will come on when an FM stereo broadcast is
received.
J Manual tuning (TUNING)

Press the tuning button marked to increase the tuning frequency and
press the tuning button marked to decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the frequency changes by 10 KHz in
the AM mode and by 0.2 MHz in the FM mode.
Constant pressure on the button causes a continuous change in the fre-
quency.
CONTINUED
5-7
J Automatic tuning (SCN)

Press the SCN button to change the radio to the SCAN mode. In this
mode, the radio scans through the radio band until a station is found.
The radio will stop at the station for five seconds while displaying the fre-
quency, after which scanning will continue until the entire band has been
scanned from the low end to the high end.
Press the SCN button again to cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on
any displayed frequency.
When the SCN button is pressed for automatic tuning, stations are
scanned in the direction of low frequencies to high frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function properly if the station reception is
weakened by distance from the station or proximity to tall buildings and
hills.
J Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button allows you to select that station
in a single operation. Up to six AM and FM stations each may be preset.
J How to preset stations

1. Press the FM/AM selection switch to select either FM or AM reception.
2. Press the SCN button or tune the radio manually until the desired
station frequency is displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for at least two seconds to store the
frequency. The frequency of the station will flash once on the display at
this time. If the button is pressed for less than two seconds, the preced-
ing selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, all stations
stored in the preset buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is neces-
sary to reset the preset buttons.
5-8
Audio
Cassette player operation
Tape travel indicator

Fast forward/
Metal tape indicator Rewind button
NR indicator (Program switching
Cassette slot buttons)
Cassette player operation indicator Stop and
eject button
Tape program sensor button Metal tape button

NR button
HG0093
NOTE
D Only use good quality cassettes (cassettes longer than C-90 are
not recommended).
D Put cassettes back in their boxes immediately after use to protect
them from dust and dirt and to prevent the tape from unwinding.
D Never expose cassettes to heat, direct sunlight or moisture.
D Clean the tape head (once or twice a month) using a wet-type
cleaning cassette.
J Cassette slot
Insert a cassette with the exposed tape side facing to the right. After in-
sertion, playback starts.
J Tape travel indicators

These indicate the direction the cassette tape is moving.
" : indicates that the top side of the cassette is being played back.
A : indicates that the bottom side of the cassette is being played back.
CONTINUED
5-9
J Program switching buttons (PROG)

When the program switching buttons ( and buttons) are
pressed at the same time during playback, the tape travel indicators will
switch and the player will begin playing back the opposite side of the
tape. The same mechanism is automatically activated when the end of
the tape is reached. This allows the opposite side of the tape to play,
providing continuous playback.
J Fast-forward button
To fast-forward the tape, press the or button in the same
direction to the tape travel indicator. To stop fast-forwarding, lightly press
the opposite side of the or button.
J Rewind button
To rewind the tape, press the or button in the opposite
direction to the tape travel indicator. To stop rewinding, lightly press the
opposite side of the or button.
J Stop and eject button ( )

When button is pressed, play back stops and the cassette tape is
ejected.
Before the ignition switch turn to the OFF position, eject the tape from
the player. Always make certain that you remove the cassette tape.
J Tape program sensor button (TPS)

Press TPS button during playback to return to the beginning of the cur-
rent selection or to skip to the beginning of the next selection. To use this
function, press the TPS button to turn on the TPS indicator. If the fast-
forward button (FF) is then pressed, the player advances the tape to the
beginning of the next selection and starts playing it. If the rewind button
(REW) is pressed instead, the player rewinds the tape to the beginning
of the current selection and starts replaying it. The TPS function may
not operate properly under the following conditions:
D When the recording level is low.
D When there are long pauses in the middle of a selection.
5-10
Audio
D When the tape contains verbal material such as conversations.

D When the blanks between selections are shorter than five seconds.
D When there are no blanks between selections (live concerts, etc.).
J Dolby NR button (BNR)

Press BNR button when playing tapes recorded using the Dolby NR
system*. The BNR indicator will light up and high-frequency noise on
the tape will be reduced for clearer sound reproduction.
* Noise reduction system manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double-D Symbol are trade marks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
J Metal tape button (MTL) 5

Press the MTL button when playing a metal or CrO2 tape.
Clock function
The radio has a built-in clock function that displays the time when the
ignition switch is turned either to ACC or ON.
DISP buttons
Tuning buttons
HG0094
J Display mode
You can select either the time display mode or function display mode by
pressing the DISP/CLK button when the ignition switch is either ACC
CONTINUED
5-11
or ON position.
B Time display mode
When the time display mode is selected, the time display takes prior-
ity of the function display. The time is shown on the display whenever
the ignition switch is ACC or ON position.
When the radio is turned on or the station is changed during the time
display mode, the time display is replaced by the frequency display.
However, after the frequency has been displayed for five seconds, it
is replaced by the time display again.
B Function display mode
When the function display mode is selected, the time is not shown on
the display. The display indicates the current function only.
When the radio is turned off during the function display mode, the
back-up light on the display goes out.
J Setting the time

1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC or ON.
2. To adjust hour: Press the DISP button and the TUNING button
indicated with together to advance the hours in one-hour increments.
Keeping the buttons pressed advances the hours quickly.
3. To adjust minute: Press the DISP button and the TUNING button
indicated together to advance the minutes in one-minute increments.
Keeping the buttons pressed advances the minutes quickly.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or radio removal, the time set-
ting will be cleared. If this occurs, it is necessary to reset the time.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing a citizen band ra-
dio or other transmitting device in your vehicle. Such devices may cause
the electronic control system to malfunction if they are incorrectly
installed or if they are not suited for the vehicle.
5-12
Interior equipment
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Vanity mirror (if equipped) ............................................. 6-2
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-2
Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Center console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Dashboard storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Coin tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Accessory power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Coat hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Spotlight (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6
Gauge pack (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Luggage cover (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Shopping bag hook (Wagon only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Cargo anchorage eyelets (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Maintenance tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Sun visors
HG0021 HG0022
To block out glare, swing down the visors. To use the sun visor at a side
window, swing it down and move it sideways.
J Vanity mirror (if equipped)

To use the vanity mirror, swing down the passenger side visor.
Storage compartment
CAUTION
D Always keep the storage compartment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden stops or an acci-
dent.
D Do not store spray cans, containers with flammable or corro-
sive liquids or any other dangerous items in the storage compart-
ment.
6-2
Interior equipment
J Glove compartment
Unlock
Lock
HS0090
To open the glove compartment, pull the handle. To close it, push the lid
firmly upward.
To lock the glove compartment, insert the master key and turn it clock-
6
wise. To unlock it, insert the masterkey and turn it counterclockwise.
J Center console
HS0279
To open the lid, pull up the lock release.
CONTINUED
6-3
B Lid tray
WARNING
Objects must not be placed on the lid tray while the vehicle is
moving. In the event of sudden braking, sudden steering, or a
collision, objects on the lid tray could be thrown toward the
vehicles occupants and could cause injuries.
CAUTION
If drinks are placed on the tray, take care to prevent them from
spilling. Spilled liquids, if hot, could burn passengers and liquids
of any kind could damage the vehicles interior trim and/or electri-
cal equipment.
HG0357
When the lid of the center console is fully opened, it can be used as a
tray on which small objects can be placed.
6-4
Interior equipment
J Dashboard storage compartment
Push
HS0094
To open the dashboard compartment, push the button and pull up on the
lid. Be sure to close the compartment fully before driving.
6
J Coin tray
HS0096
To open the coin tray, pull the upper edge of the lid.
CONTINUED
6-5
Cup holder
CAUTION
D When not in use, always keep the holder stored while driving
to reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
D Do not pick up a cup from the cup holder or put a cup in the
holder while you are driving, as this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
D Take care to avoid spills. Beverages, if hot, might burn you or
your passengers. Spilled beverages may also damage upholstery,
carpets or audio equipment.
B Drivers cup holder
For small cap
For large cap
HS0097 HS0098
To use the cup holder, pull it out to the first click stop. If you want to
use a larger cup, pull it out farther until it stops.
6-6
Interior equipment
B Front passengers cup holder
HS0305 HG0306
The front passengers cup holder is built in the center console. To use
the cup holder, open the lid of the console and open the holder. When
not in use, fold the holder and close the lid.
6
Accessory power socket
B Electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instru-
ment panel
CAUTION
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the
instrument panel is designed to use only a SUBARU genuine cig-
arette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs
or any plug-in type electrical accessories in the socket. Doing
so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
Refer to the Cigarette lighter section in this chapter.
B Accessory power socket in the luggage compartment (if

equipped)
CAUTION
D Do not attempt to use a cigarette lighter in the accessory
power socket.
CONTINUED
6-7
D Do not place any foreign objects, especially metal ones such

as coins or aluminum foil, into the accessory power socket. That
could cause a short circuit. Always put the cap on the accessory
power socket when it is not in use.
D Use only electrical appliances which are designed for 12V DC
and which consume less than 120W. Overloading the accessory
power socket can cause a short circuit. Do not use double adapt-
ers or more than one electrical appliance.
D If the plug on your electric appliance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power socket, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly in the accessory power socket.
D Use of an electric appliance in the accessory power socket for
a long period of time while the engine is not running can cause
battery discharge.
HG6000BA
The accessory power socket is located on the right side of the lug-
gage compartment.
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery is on tap at the socket
when the ignition switch is either in the ACC or ON position.
You can use an in-car use electrical appliance by connecting it to the
socket.
6-8
Interior equipment
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
CAUTION
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the
instrumnet panel is designed to use only a SUBARU genuine cig-
arette lighter plug. Do not use non-genuine cigarette lighter plugs
or any plug-in type electrical accessories in the socket. Doing
so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resulting in a fire.
HG0299
The electrical power socket located on the lower part of the instrument
panel can only be used as cigarette lighter socket. A cigarette lighter
plug is an optional accessory. It is available from your SUBARU dealer.
If smoking is not desired, always put the cap on the socket to prevent
any foreign object from entering it.
B Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp the lighter by the end with
the heating element. Doing so could result in injury and could
also damage the heating element.
CONTINUED
6-9
CAUTION
Do not hold the lighter pushed in, because it will overheat.
HS0106
The cigarette lighter operates only when the ignition switch is in the
ON and ACC positions.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the knob and wait a few moments.
It will automatically spring up when ready for use.
Ashtray
CAUTION
Do not use ashtrays as waste receptacles or leave a lighted ciga-
rette in an ashtray. This could cause a fire.
B Front ashtray
Fully close the ashtray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.
6-10
Interior equipment
HS0107
To open the ashtray, pull the lid out.

To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while push-
ing the inner plate down.
B Rear ashtray
6
The ashtray is located at the back of the center console for use by
rear seat passengers.
To open the ashtray, pull the upper edge of the lid. Fully close the
ashtray after using it to help reduce residual smoke.
To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it and pull it out while push-
ing the inner plate down.
HG0307
CONTINUED
6-11
Coat hook
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat hook that might obstruct the
drivers view or that could cause injury in sudden stops or in a
collision. And do not hang items on the coat hook that weigh 2.2
lb (1 kg) or more.
OM-H0132
Interior light
OM-H0133
The interior light switch has three positions:

ON: The light stays on continuously.
6-12
Interior equipment
Middle position: The light comes on only when any door is opened.
OFF: The light stays off.
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
Spotlight (if equipped)
OM-H0134
To turn on the spotlight, push the switch. To turn it off, push the switch
again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the light is turned off to avoid bat-
tery discharge.
CONTINUED
6-13
Gauge pack (if equipped)
CAUTION
Never attempt to adjust any instrument settings while driving. Do-
ing so may lead to an accident.
The gauge pack displays following information.

D Compass direction
D Barometric pressure
D Altitude
D Outside temperature
B Display
HS6004BB
D The display operates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position.
D The display brightness can be adjusted by pressing the LIGHT
CONTROL button repeatedly to change from dim to bright to off.
6-14
Interior equipment
HS6005BB
B Measurement unit selection (Default setting is English units)

The following procedure is required to select measurement units other
than English.
6
HS6006BB
1. Turn on the ignition switch to the ACC position and the display
shows the default English measurement units.
2. Depress the ADJ switch for 5 seconds or more and the display
will show DEVIATION together with the 5 and W.
CONTINUED
6-15
HS6007BB
3. Change the measurement units by pressing the MODE switch

until the proper mode appears.
4. Press the ADJ switch to save your selection.
NOTE
D If the setting is not completed in 30 seconds, the display will
return to the initial mode.
D When the battery is disconnected, you may have to perform
this operation again to reset to the desired units.
B Compass
The compass displays eight (8) directions.
HS6008BB
6-16
Interior equipment
NOTE
The compass may be affected by interference in the magnetic
field. (For example natural and artificial causes like tunnels, sub-
ways, sub-stations, railways, and so forth may affect compass
operation.)
n Compass setting
6
HS6006CB
1. Deviation setting
HS6009AB
Depending on your location, the following adjustment is required due

to the difference between magnetic and geographic North. Refer to
CONTINUED
6-17
the map shown above for the setting most appropriate for your loca-
tion.
1) Press the ADJ switch for 5 seconds or more.
2) Press the YSET or B to obtain the correct setting.
YSET: 0 & W, 5 & E, 10 & E, ...
B: 10 & W 15 & W, ...
3) Press the ADJ switch again to save the setting and return the
system to the original display.
2. Direction setting
If the vehicle icon is blinking at any time, the following adjustment is
required to recalibrate the compass.
NOTE
This will happen due to the magnetic field interference as
described previously.
HS6010BA HS6011BB
1) Press the ADJ switch for the compass setting mode.
NOTE
D The compass starts blinking in this mode.
D This mode can be canceled by pressing the ADJ switch
again.
2) Make certain that it is safe to do so and then drive the vehicle in a
circle until the compass stops blinking. You may have to complete
more than one circle to perform this calibration.
6-18
Interior equipment
NOTE
D When setting is completed, all blinking disappears.
D The setting mode is automatically cancelled if the ADJ
switch is pressed in the middle of setting or if the setting is not
completed within 2 minutes.
The motion indicator bars move in two patterns according to the
vehicle speed.
HS6012BB
1. 1.8 mile/h (2.8 km/h) of vehicle speed ... 1 second interval bar
motion.
2. 12.5 mile/h (20 km/h) or more of vehicle speed ... 0.5 second inter-
val bar motion.
NOTE
D When the vehicle stops, the motion indicator bars will return to
their original position.
D When the vehicle is driven in reverse, the motion bars move in
the same pattern as when driving forward.
CONTINUED
6-19
B Barometer
HS6004CB
The display indicates atmospheric pressure in the passenger

compartment.
Range: 21.26 to 30.86 inHg or 720 to 1045 hpa
NOTE
D The reading may change during air-conditioner operation,
door window operation, driving in a tunnel, and so forth.
D All barometric readings reported in local weather reports are
corrected to a sea-level reading regardless of altitude. The Gauge
Pack displays true local air pressure and hence may differ signifi-
cantly from local weather reports (especially at higher altitudes).
The barometer is not adjustable.
D Since air pressure changes with altitude, the barometric read-
ing will vary when the vehicle is moving up or down an incline.
For accurate barometric trending, the vehicle should be station-
ary.
B Altimeter
The altimeter has two modes, Standard elevation mode and Relative
elevation mode.
6-20
Interior equipment
HS6013BB
HS6014BB
n Standard elevation mode

The MODE switch changes the barometer to the standard elevation
mode of the altimeter.
The altimeter indicates the sea level elevation.
Range: 660 to 9200 ft (200 to 2800 m) at a pitch of 20 ft or 10 m in
metric measurement units.
Adjustment: In order to get a precise elevation, manually correct the
altimeter when the current elevation is known.
YSET: 20 ft increase or 10 m increase in metric measurement units.
B: 20 ft decrease or 10 m decrease in metric measurement units.
CONTINUED
6-21
NOTE
D The indication may change during air-conditioner operation,
door window operation, driving in a tunnel, and so forth.
D Adjustable elevation is 780 ft (300 m).
D To cancel the adjustment and return to the default altimeter
reading, press the YSET and B switch together for 1 second
or more.
n Relative elevation mode
HS6015BB
The altimeter indicates the relative elevation.

1. The MODE switch changes the standard elevation mode to the
relative elevation mode.
2. Press the YSET switch for the 0 ft (0 m) setting.
3. The display shows the current elevation relative to the starting
elevation.
Range: up to 9800 ft (3000 m) at a pitch of 20 ft (5 m)
6-22
Interior equipment
B Outside temperature gauge
HS6004DB
The indication shows the outside temperature.
NOTE
Indication range: 40F to 140 F (40C to 60C) 6
If the temperature is beyond the range, the maximum number is
shown.
Luggage cover (Wagon only)
WARNING
Do not place anything on the extended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can break it and an object on the
cover could tumble forward in the event of a sudden stop or colli-
sion. This could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear gate stay when using the lug-
gage cover.
The scratch on the stay could cause the rear gate to incomplete
opening.
The luggage cover is provided for covering the cargo area and to pro-
CONTINUED
6-23
tect its contents from direct sunlight. This cover is detachable to make
room for additional cargo.
B Using the cover
HG0097 HG0098
To extend the cover, pull the end of the cover out of the cover hous-
ing, then insert its hooks into the catches as shown. To rewind it, un-
hook it from the catches and it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into the cover housing while it
is rewinding.
B To remove the cover housing
Match mark
HG0099, HG0190
1. Rewind the cover.

2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the cover housing to shorten its
length.
6-24
Interior equipment
3. Take it off the retainer.

4. Store the cover housing in the cargo area.
B To install the cover housing
1. Pull either sleeve on the end of the cover housing to shorten the
covers length.
2. Insert the projections located on the both ends of the sleeve into
the recesses of the retainers.
Shopping bag hook (Wagon only)
HG0191
The shopping bag hook is attached to the left side of the cargo area. You
can hook a light shopping bag or something similar on it.
Cargo anchorage eyelets (if equipped)
CAUTION
The cargo anchorage eyelets are designed only for securing light
cargo. Never try to secure the cargo which weights more than the
load capacity of the anchorage eyelets. The maximum load
capacity is about 44 lbs (20 kg) per eyelet.
CONTINUED
6-25
Anchorage eyelets
HG0192
The cargo area is equipped with four anchorage eyelets so that cargo
can be secured with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the anchorage eyelets, raise them up from under the cutouts
of the luggage compartment mat. When not in use, put the eyelets down
into the storing recesses.
Maintenance tools
OM-H0142
Your vehicle is equipped with the following maintenance tools:

Screwdriver
Wheel nut wrench
Wheel cover remover (for vehicles equipped with wheel covers)
6-26
Starting and operating

New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
State emission testing (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Fuel economy hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Preparing to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Driving in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Periodic inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Key reminder chime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Key interlock release (AT vehicles only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Rear viscous limited slip differential (For RS models) . . . . . . . 7-26
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Tilt steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Cruise control (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Parking your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Braking tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Driving tips for AWD vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Off road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Loading your vehicle .................................................... 7-47
Vehicle capacity weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and Gross
Axle Weight Rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Trailer towing .............................................................. 7-49
Trailer hitches ............................................................ 7-51
7-2
New vehicle break-in driving the first 1,000 miles

(1,600 km)
The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you
handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions
during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km):
D Do not race the engine.
B Break-in engine speed limit
D Vehicle with tachometer
Never exceed 4,000 rpm engine speed except for brief acceleration
in an emergency.
D Vehicle without tachometer (for manual transmission)
Do not exceed the speed limits below for each gear position except
for brief acceleration in an emergency.
mph (km/h)
1st 2nd 3rd 4th

7
20 (30) 30 (50) 50 (80) 65 (105)
D Vehicles without tachometer (for automatic transmission)

Try to drive at moderate speeds while accelerating and braking
smoothly. Proper gears are selected automatically according to the
driving conditions.
D Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,
either fast or slow.
D Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emer-
gency.
D Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be applied to a newly-installed or
overhauled engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced
with new ones.
CONTINUED
7-3
Fuel requirements
B Fuel octane rating
Your engine is designed to use only unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating of 87 AKI or higher. This octane rating is the average of the Re-
search Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred
to as the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and
heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned
if your vehicle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or
when you accelerate. See your dealer or a qualified service techni-
cian if you use a gasoline with the specified octane rating and your
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
B Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed to accept only an unleaded
gasoline filler nozzle. Under no circumstances should leaded gaso-
line be used because it will damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
B Gasoline for California-certified LEV
Your vehicle was certified to Californias low emission vehicle (LEV)
standards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label. It is designed
to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur California gasoline specifications.
If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate
on gasoline meeting Federal specifications. Gasoline sold outside
California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect
the performance of your vehicles catalytic converter and may pro-
duce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. SUBARU recommends that you
try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to deter-
mine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
7-4
B Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels
containing alcohol may cause paint damage, which is not cov-
ered under the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent additives will help prevent depos-
its from forming in your engine and fuel system. This helps keep your
engine in tune and your emission control system working properly,
and is a way of doing your part for cleaner air. If you continuously use
a high quality fuel with the proper detergent and other additives, you
should never need to add any fuel system cleaning agents to your
fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with materials called oxygenates.
Use of these fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. Oxygenated
blend fuels, such as MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) or ethanol 7
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in your vehicle, but should con-
tain no more than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the proper operation
of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are now producing reformulated
gasolines, which are designed to reduce vehicle emissions. SUBARU
approves the use of reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains, you should ask your service
station operators if their gasolines contain detergents and oxygenates
and if they have been reformulated to reduce vehicle emissions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels suited for your vehicle as ex-
plained below.
D Fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower
than that specified in this manual.
D Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is sometimes mixed with un-
leaded gasoline. Methanol can be used in your vehicle ONLY if it
does not exceed 5% of the fuel mixture AND if it is accompanied
by sufficient quantities of the proper cosolvents and corrosion in-
CONTINUED
7-5
hibitors required to prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not use

fuel containing methanol EXCEPT under these conditions.
D If undesirable driveability problems are experienced and you
suspect they may be fuel related, try a different brand of gasoline
before seeking service at your SUBARU dealer.
D Fuel system damage or driveability problems which result from
the use of improper fuel are not covered under the SUBARU Lim-
ited Warranty.
State emission testing (U.S. only)
WARNING
Testing of an All Wheel drive vehicle must NEVER be performed
on a single two-wheel dynamometer. Attempting to do so will
result in uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an acci-
dent or injuries to persons nearby.
CAUTION
Resultant vehicle damage due to improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited Warranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or its contractors or licensees.
At state inspection time, remember to tell your inspection or service

station in advance not to place your SUBARU AWD vehicle on a two-
wheel dynamometer. Otherwise, serious transmission damage will
result.
Some states have started using dynamometers in their state inspection
programs in order to meet their obligation under federal law to implement
stricter vehicle emission standards to reduce air pollution from cars. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like testing device that allows your
cars wheels to turn while the car remains in one place. Depending on
the severity of a states air pollution problems, the states must adopt
either a basic or enhanced vehicle emission inspection test. Nor-
7-6
mally, a portion of the basic emission test consists of an emission

inspector inserting an analyzer probe into the exhaust pipe of an idling
vehicle for a short period of time. States with more severe air pollution
problems are required to adopt an enhanced vehicle emission test. This
test simulates actual driving conditions on a dynamometer and permits
more accurate measurement of tailpipe emitted pollution than the basic
emission test.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and states using two-
wheel dynamometers in their emission testing programs have
EXEMPTED SUBARU AWD vehicles from the portion of the testing pro-
gram that involves a two-wheel dynamometer.
There are some states that use four-wheel dynamometers in their testing
programs. When properly used, that equipment will not damage an AWD
SUBARU vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear wheels be jacked off the
ground, nor should the driveshaft be disconnected for state emission
testing. 7
Engine exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
D Never inhale engine exhaust gas. Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which is danger-
ous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
D Always properly maintain the engine exhaust system to pre-
vent engine exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
D Never run the engine in a closed space, such as a garage, ex-
cept for the brief time needed to drive the vehicle in or out of it.
D Avoid remaining in a parked vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is unavoidable, then use the ventila-
tion fan to force fresh air into the vehicle.
D Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille free from snow,
leaves or other obstructions to ensure that the ventilation system
always works properly.
CONTINUED
7-7
D If at any time you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem checked and corrected as soon as pos-
sible. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with all
windows fully open.
D Keep the trunk lid or rear gate closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction of the metals used in the
manufacture of the exhaust system, you may hear a crackling sound
coming from the exhaust system for a short time after the engine
has been shut off. This sound is normal.
Catalytic converter
WARNING
D Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g. grass, paper, rags or leaves), be-
cause the catalytic converter operates at very high temperatures.
D Keep everyone and flammable materials away from the ex-
haust pipe while the engine is running. The exhaust gas is very
hot.
HB3003BA
The catalytic converter is installed in the exhaust system. It serves as a
7-8
catalyst to reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust gases, thus providing

cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:
D Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small amount of leaded fuel will dam-
age the catalytic converter.
D Never start the engine by pushing or pulling the vehicle.
D Avoid racing the engine.
D Never turn off the ignition switch while the vehicle is moving.
D Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel the engine running rough (mis-
firing, backfiring or incomplete combustion), have your vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
D Do not apply undercoating or rust prevention treatment to the heat
shield of catalytic converter and the exhaust system
Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to save your fuel. 7
D Select the proper gear position for the speed and road conditions.
D Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration. Always accelerate gently
until you reach the desired speed. Then try to maintain that speed for as
long as possible.
D Do not pump the accelerator and avoid racing the engine.
D Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
D Keep the engine properly tuned.
D Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure shown on the tire plac-
ard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side. Low pres-
sure will increase tire wear and fuel consumption.
D Use the air conditioner only when necessary.
D Keep the front and rear wheels in proper alignment.
D Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or cargo.
CONTINUED
7-9
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks and adjustments every day be-
fore you start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and lights are clean and unob-
structed.
2. Check the appearance and condition of the tires. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk and rear gate are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened
their seat belts.
8. Check the operation of the warning and indicator lights when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the ON position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warning lights after starting the en-
gine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, washer fluid and other fluid
levels should be checked daily, weekly or at fuel stops.
Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle in another country:
D Confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (Refer to the Fuel require-
ment section in this chapter.)
D Comply with all regulations and requirements of each country.
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition at all times, always have the
recommended maintenance services listed in the maintenance schedule
in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet performed at the specified
time or mileage intervals.
7-10
Ignition switch
WARNING
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK while the vehicle is be-
ing driven or towed because that will lock the steering wheel, pre-
venting steering control. And when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than usual to steer.
The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
HS0122
B LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed in this position. The ignition
switch will lock the steering wheel when you remove the key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the steering wheel slightly to the right
and left as you turn the key.
CONTINUED
7-11
n Automatic transmission vehicles
HS0123 HG0101
The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the selector
lever is in the P position.
n Manual transmission vehicles
OM-H0144
The key can be turned from ACC to LOCK only when the key is
pushed in while turning it.
B ACC
In this position the electrical accessories (radio, accessory socket,
etc.) can be used.
B ON
This is the normal operating position after the engine is started.
7-12
B START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the START position while the
engine is running.
The engine is started in this position. The starter cranks the engine to
start it. When the key is released (after the engine has started), the
key automatically returns to the ON position.
J Key reminder chime

The reminder chime sounds when the drivers door opens and the key is
in the LOCK or ACC positions. The chime stops when the key is re-
moved from the ignition switch.
J Key interlock release (AT vehicles only)

If the key can not be turned to the LOCK position even when the selec-
tor lever is in the P position: 7
Release lever
Vehicle
HS0126 front HS0127
1. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.

2. Remove three screws securing the undercover of the steering col-
umn.
3. Remove the undercover of the steering column.
4. Turn the ignition key while pressing the key interlock release lever.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the
key interlock system repaired.
CONTINUED
7-13
Starting the engine
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor continuously for more than ten
seconds. If the engine fails to start after operating the starter for
five to ten seconds, wait for ten seconds or more before trying
again.
B Manual transmission vehicles

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Press the clutch pedal to the floor and shift the shift lever into neu-
tral. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine. The
starter motor will only operate when the clutch pedal is pressed fully
to the floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the opera-
tion of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and indica-
tor lights section (chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depressing
the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the engine
has started.
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then
turn the ignition switch to the START position again while depressing
the accelerator pedal half way down.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone off after the
engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers the
idle speed as the engine warms up.
B Automatic transmission vehicles
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the vehicle is moving, shift the se-
lector lever into the N position. Do not attempt to place the se-
lector lever of a moving vehicle into the P position.
7-14
1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Shift the selector lever to the P or N position (preferably P
position).
The starter will only operate when the select lever is at the P or N
position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check the opera-
tion of the warning and indicator lights. Refer to Warning and indica-
tor lights section (chapter 3).
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START position without depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. Release the key immediately after the en-
gine has started.
If the engine does not start within ten seconds, wait a while and then
turn the ignition switch to the START position again while depressing
the accelerator pedal half way down.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator lights have gone out after
the engine has started. The fuel injection system automatically lowers
7
the idle speed as the engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make sure that the selector lever is at
the P or N position and that the parking brake is applied.
B During cold weather below 4F ( 20C)
If the engine is difficult to start using the normal method (without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal), turn the ignition switch to the
START position while slightly depressing the accelerator pedal.
B Flooded engine
If the engine does not start, it may be flooded (excessive fuel in the
engine).
In case of a flooded engine, turn the starter motor for five seconds
with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Repeat this two or three
times until the engine starts. Release the ignition switch and accelera-
tor pedal as soon as the engine starts.
CONTINUED
7-15
Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the vehicle is moving. This will
cause loss of power to the power steering and the brake booster,
making steering and braking more difficult. It could also result in
accidental activation of the LOCK position on the ignition
switch, causing the steering wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off only when the engine is idling.
Manual transmission
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident is consequently increased.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the vehicle has completely
stopped. It may cause damage to the transmission to try shifting
into reverse when the vehicle is moving.
The manual transmission is a fully synchromeshed 5-forward and 1-re-

verse speed transmission.
7-16
HS0365
The shift pattern is shown on the shift lever knob. When shifting from 5th
gear to reverse gear, first return the shift lever to neutral position then
shift into the reverse gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch pedal, move the shift lever,
and gradually let the pedal up.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the transmission in neutral, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then try again. 7
B Shifting speeds
n Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel economy and vehicle perfor-
mance during normal driving is ensured by shifting up at the speeds
listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (65)
4th to 5th 45 (73)
CONTINUED
7-17
n Maximum allowable speeds
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle
is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of
an accident increased.
The following table shows the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear.
Never exceed the speed limit below for each gear position except for
brief acceleration in an emergency. The tachometers needle (if so
equipped) will enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded. Fail-
ure to obseve this precaution can lead to excessive engine wear and
poor fuel economy.
mph (km/h)
Vehicle 2.2 liter models
type 2 5 liter
2.5
except OUTBACK OUTBACK RS models
Gear SPORT SPORT
1st 29 (46) 29 (47) 28 (45)
2nd 48 (77) 49 (79) 47 (76)
3rd 70 (113) 71 (115) 68 (110)
B Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and do not use
the clutch to hold your vehicle at a standstill on an upgrade. Either of
those actions may cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the shift lever. This may cause
wear on the transmission components.
7-18
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle speed due to slow traffic, turn-

ing corners, or driving up steep hills, downshift to a lower gear before
the engine starts to labor.
On steep downgrades, downshift the transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd
gear as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe speed and to extend
brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking effect. Remember, if you
ride (over use) the brakes while descending a hill, they may over-
heat and not work properly.
Automatic transmission
WARNING
Do not shift from the P or N position into the D, 3, 2,
1 or R position while depressing the accelerator pedal. This
may cause the vehicle to jump forward or backward. 7
CAUTION
D Shift into the P or R position only after the vehicle is com-
pletely stopped. Shifting while the vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
D Do not race the engine for more than five seconds in any posi-
tion except the N or P position when the brake is set or the
tires are on blocks. This may cause the automatic transmission
fluid to overheat.
D Avoid shifting from one of the forward driving positions into
the R position or vice versa until the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may cause damage to the transmission.
The automatic transmission is electronically controlled with 4-forward

speeds and 1-reverse speed.
CONTINUED
7-19
NOTE
Immediately after a disconnected battery is reconnected or ATF (au-
tomatic transmission fluid) is replaced, you may feel that the auto-
matic transmission operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from erasure or invalidation of data the on-board com-
puter has collected and stored in memory to allow the transmission
to shift at the most appropriate times for the current condition of
your vehicle. Optimized shifting will be restored as the vehicle con-
tinues to be driven for a while.
J Selector lever
With the brake pedal

depressed, shift while
pressing the button in
Shift while pressing
the button in
Release button
Shift without pressing
the button
HS0129 OM-H0149
The selector lever has seven positions.

The release button must be pushed to select the P, R, or 2 posi-
tions.
B P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is mechanically locked to prevent the
vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the parking brake fully, then shift
into the P position. Do not hold the vehicle with only the transmis-
sion.
A shift interlock function is employed in the automatic transmission
system to ensure safe starting of the vehicle.
7-20
To shift the selector lever from the P to the any other position, you
have to depress the brake pedal fully then push the release button on
the selector lever when the ignition switch is in the ON position. This
prevents the vehicle from lurching when it is started.
If the shift lever does not move from the P position with the brake
pedal depressed and the release button pushed in when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, refer to the Shift lock release section
in this chapter.
B R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the N to R position, first stop the vehicle completely
then move the lever to the R position while pushing the release but-
ton.
B N (Neutral)
WARNING 7
Do not drive the vehicle with the selector lever in the N (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no effect in this condition and the
risk of an accident is consequently increased.
This position is for restarting a stalled engine.

In this position the wheels and transmission are not locked. In this
position, the transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll freely, even on
the slightest incline unless the parking brake or foot brake is on.
Avoid coasting with the transmission neutral. During coasting, the
engine braking does not act.
B D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
4th according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-
ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
CONTINUED
7-21
the pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
n While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to 4th gear is prevented from
taking place when the accelerator is released. This minimizes the
chance of subsequent downshifting to a lower gear when accelerat-
ing again. This prevents repeated upshifting and downshifting result-
ing in a smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd or 1st gear, depending on
the way the accelerator pedal is pressed to accelerate the vehicle
again.
n While going down a hill
When descending a steep hill, depressing the brake pedal will cause
the transmission to downshift to 3rd gear, thus applying engine brak-
ing. Reacceleration for a short time will cause the transmission to up-
shift normally.
NOTE
In some cases, depressing the brake pedal on a downhill grade
does not result in an automatic downshift to 3rd gear. This can
happen when the automatic transmission fluid temperature is
very low, for example, during driving shortly after the vehicle has
been parked for an extended period of time. When the ATF tem-
perature has risen to a certain level, automatic downshift normal-
ly takes place. In the meantime, downshift manually for engine
braking as required.
Also, downshifting when braking downhill will not occur at
speeds above approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
B 3 (Third)
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a grade.
The transmission automatically shifts into a suitable gear from 1st to
3rd according to the vehicle speed and the acceleration you require.
7-22
When more acceleration is required in this position, press the acceler-

ator pedal fully to the floor and hold that position. The transmission
will automatically downshift to 2nd or 1st gear. When you release the
pedal, the transmission will return to the original gear position.
B 2 (Second)
To shift from the 3 position, push the release button.
This position is for using engine braking when going down a hill or for
climbing a steep grade.
In this position, the transmission holds in the 2nd gear.
Use this position when starting off form a standstill on slippery road
surfaces such as mud or snow. It will ensure greater traction.
B 1 (First)
This position is for driving up or down very steep grades, or driving
through mud or sand, or on slippery surfaces. In this position, the
transmission holds in the 1st gear.
B Maximum speeds 7
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure that the vehicle is not travel-
ling at a speed exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speed for the
gear which is about to be selected. Failure to observe this pre-
caution can lead to engine over-revving and this in turn can
result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of engine brakes when the vehicle
is travelling on a slippery surface can lead to wheel locking; as a
consequence, control of the vehicle may be lost and the risk of
an accident increased.
The following tables show the maximum speeds that are possible with
each different gear. The tachometers (if so equipped) needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are exceeded.
When shifting down a gear, it is important to confirm that the current
vehicle speed is not in excess of the Maximum Allowable Speed of
CONTINUED
7-23
the gear which is about to be selected.

Exceeding the Maximum Allowable Speeds will result in over-revving
of the engine. In addition a powerful engine brake will engage and
control of the vehicle may be lost.
mph (km/h)
Vehicle 2.2 liter models
type 2 5 liter
2.5
except OUTBACK OUTBACK RS models
Gear SPORTS SPORTS
1st 35 (56) 35 (56) 30 (49)
2nd 62 (100) 63 (102) 57 (91)
3rd 96 (155) 98 (157) 91 (147)
NOTE
D In order to prevent over-revving during acceleration of the
vehicle, the transmission will automatically shift to the next high-
est gear if the Maximum Allowable Speed for the current gear is
exceeded.
D Similarly, in order to prevent over-revving during deceleration
of the vehicle, the transmission will remain in the current gear if
the speed of the vehicle is in excess of the Maximum Allowable
Speed for the gear to which the selector lever has been moved.
B Driving tips
D Always apply the foot or parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped in the D, 3, 2, 1, or R position.
D Always set the parking brake when parking your vehicle. Do not
hold the vehicle with only the transmission.
D Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary position on an uphill grade
by using the D, 3, 2 or 1 position. Use the brake instead.
J Shift lock release

If the selector lever does not move from the P position with the brake
pedal depressed and the release button pushed in and the ignition
switch in the ON position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the engine.
7-24
HS0130 HS0131
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool bag.

3. Open the center console and remove two screws securing the park-
ing brake lever cover.
4. Remove the parking brake lever cover by pulling up on the covers
rear end.
5. Raise the rear end of the selector lever cover.
7
Shaft portion of
the screwdriver
HS0132
6. Draw the shaft portion of the screwdriver from the grip and then insert
the shaft into the hole.
7. Push down on the shaft while pushing the release button and move
the selector lever from the P to the N position.
8. Remove the shaft from the hole. Depress the brake pedal and start
the engine.
Take your vehicle to the nearest SUBARU dealer immediately to have the
system repaired.
CONTINUED
7-25
Rear viscous limited slip differential

(For RS models)
CAUTION
D Never start the engine while a tire on one side is jacked up, as
the vehicle may move.
D If one rear tire is spinning in mud, avoid continued spinning at
high speed as this could adversely affect the LSD.
D If a different size rear tire is temporarily used (as in an emer-
gency), it will adversely affect the LSD. Always replace it with a
regular size tire as soon as possible.
The LSD provides optimum distribution of power according to the differ-

ence in revolutions between the right and left rear wheels that may be
caused by certain driving conditions, thereby improving driving stability
on snow-covered, muddy or other slippery roads.
Steering
J Tilt steering wheel
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt position while driving. This
may cause loss of vehicle control and result in personal injury.
7-26
B Tilt adjustment
HS0134
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to Front seat section (chapter 2).
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired level.
4. Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked by moving it
up and down. 7
J Power steering
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the fully locked position left or
right for more than five seconds. This may damage the power
steering pump.
The power steering system operates only when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system
fails to function, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
CONTINUED
7-27
Cruise control (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under any of the following condi-
tions. This may cause loss of vehicle control:
D driving up or down a steep grade
D driving on slippery or winding roads
D driving in heavy traffic
Cruise control enables you to maintain a constant vehicle speed without

holding your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is operative when the
vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
Make sure the main switch is turned OFF when the cruise control is not
in use to avoid unintentionally setting the cruise control.
B To set cruise control
Cruise control lever
HB3002BB HG0312
1. Push the CRUISE main switch.

2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the vehicle reaches to the de-
sired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the SET, COAST direction
and release it. Then release the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the desired speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily increased while driving with the
cruise control activated. Simply depress the accelerator pedal to ac-
7-28
celerate the vehicle. When the accelerator pedal is released, the ve-
hicle will return to and maintain the previous cruising speed.
B To temporarily cancel the cruise control
There are four ways to cancel the cruise control temporarily:
D Depress the brake pedal.
D Pull the control lever in the CANCEL direction.
D Depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission vehicles only).
D Shift the selector lever into the N position (automatic transmis-
sion vehicles only).
To resume the cruise control after it has been temporarily canceled
and with vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, push the control
lever upward in the ACCEL, RESUME direction to return to the origi-
nal cruising speed automatically.
B To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Push the main switch again.
7
D Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
B To change the cruising speed
n To increase the speed
1. Push the control lever upward in the ACCEL, RESUME direction
and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
The control lever can be used for increasing the cruising speed slight-
ly. Pressing the control lever upward in the ACCEL, RESUME direc-
tion increases the vehicle speed about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Press the
control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.
OR
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle to the de-
sired speed.
once. Now the desired speed is set and the vehicle will keep running
at that speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.
CONTINUED
7-29
n To decrease the speed

and hold it until the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
The control lever can be used for decreasing the cruising speed
slightly. Pressing the control lever downward in the SET, COAST
direction decreases the vehicle speed about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). Press
the control lever repeatedly until the desired speed is reached.
OR
1. Depress the brake pedal to release cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the desired speed, press the control
lever downward in the SET, COAST direction once. Now the desired
speed is set and the vehicle will keep running at that speed without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
D Never leave unattended children or pets in the vehicle. They
could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadver-
tent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot or sunny days, the tem-
perature in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough
to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to them.
D Do not park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust system parts.
D Always stop the engine if you take a nap in the vehicle. If en-
gine exhaust gas enters the passenger compartment, occupants
in the vehicle could die from carbon monoxide (CO) contained in
the exhaust gas.
7-30
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake is set because this will cause
unnecessary wear on the brake linings. Before starting to drive,
always make sure that the parking brake has been fully released.
To set the parking brake, press the brake pedal firmly and hold it down
while fully pulling up the parking brake lever.
Release button
HG0313 7
To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release
button, then lower the lever while keeping the button pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the engine is running, the parking
brake warning light comes on. After starting the vehicle, be sure that the
warning light has gone out before the vehicle is driven. Refer to the War-
ning and indicator lights section (chapter 3).
When parking your vehicle, always set the parking brake firmly and put
the shift lever in the 1 (1st) for an upgrade or R (Reverse) for a down
grade for manual transmission vehicles, or in the P (Park) position for
automatic transmission vehicles.
Always set the parking brake firmly when parking your vehicle. Never
rely on the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
For better parking brake power, depress the brake pedal firmly while set-
ting the parking brake (Drum brake only).
CONTINUED
7-31
OM-H0161 OM-H0162
When parking on a hill, always turn the steering wheel. When the vehicle
is headed up the hill, the front wheels should be turned away from the
curb. When facing down hill, the front wheels should be turned into the
curb.
Braking
J Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This can
cause dangerous overheating of the brakes and needless wear
on the brake pads and linings.
B When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain, in puddle or after washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result, brake stopping distance will be long-
er. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly
depressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
B Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking in addition to foot braking.
When descending a grade, if only the foot brake is used, the brakes
may start working improperly because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To help prevent this, shift into a
7-32
lower gear to get stronger engine braking.

B Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly when a tire is punctured.
This could cause a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the road
to a safe place.
J Brake system
B Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit brake systems. Each circuit
works diagonally across the vehicle. If one circuit of the brake system
should fail, the other half of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will goes down much closer to the floor than usual
and you will need to press it down much harder. And a much longer
distance will be needed to stop the vehicle.
B Brake booster 7
The brake booster uses engine manifold vacuum to assist braking
force. Do not turn off the engine while driving because that will turn off
the brake booster, resulting in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even when the brake booster com-
pletely stops functioning. If this happens, however, you will have to
push the pedal much harder than normal and the braking distance
will increase.
CONTINUED
7-33
J Disc brake pad wear warning indicators
OM-H0163
The disc brake pad wear warning indicators on the disc brakes give a
warning noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard from the disc brakes while
braking, immediately have your vehicle checked by your SUBARU deal-
er.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) (if equipped)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS equipped vehicle could easily lead to
a serious accident.
CAUTION
D The ABS system does not always decrease stopping distance.
You should always maintain a safe following distance from other
vehicles.
D When driving on badly surfaced roads, gravel roads, icy roads,
or over deep newly fallen snow, stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS system than one without. When driv-
ing under these conditions, therefore, reduce your speed and
7-34
leave ample distance from other vehicles.

D When you feel the ABS system operating, you should maintain
constant brake pedal pressure. Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the operation of the ABS system.
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of wheels which may occur during
sudden braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This helps prevent
the loss of steering control and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you may hear a chattering noise or
feel a slight vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal when the ABS
operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the vehicle speed is below
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
B ABS system self-checking
You may feel a slight shock in the brake pedal and hear the operating
sound of ABS from the engine compartment just after the vehicle is 7
started. This is caused by an automatic functional test of the ABS sys-
tem being carried out and does not indicate any abnormal condition.
B ABS warning light
HG0346
The ABS warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and goes out after about two seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system is working properly.
CONTINUED
7-35
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as follows, the ABS system may not
be working properly.
When the warning light is on, the ABS function shuts down; how-
ever, the conventional brake system continues to operate normal-
ly.
D The warning light does not come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
D The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position, but it does not go out even when the vehicle
speed exceeds approximately 8mph (12km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system repaired at the first available
opportunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as described below, the ABS sys-
tem may be considered normal.
D The warning light comes on right after the engine is started
but goes out immediately, remaining off.
D The warning light remains on after the engine has been
started, but it goes out when the vehicle speed reaches about 8
mph (12 km/h).
D The warning light comes on during driving, but it goes out
immediately and remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery voltage such as when the en-
gine is jump started, the ABS warning light may come on. This is due
to the low battery voltage and does not indicate a malfunction. When
the battery becomes fully charged, the light will go out.
7-36
Driving tips for AWD vehicles
WARNING
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-
tions.
D Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
HS0113
All wheel drive distributes the engine power to all four wheels. AWD
vehicles provide better traction when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
covered roads and when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. By shifting
power between the front and rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also pro-
vide added traction during acceleration and added engine braking force
during deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle may handle differently than an
ordinary two wheel drive vehicle and it contains some features unique to
AWD. For safety purposes as well as to avoid damaging the AWD sys-
tem, you should keep the following tips in mind:
D An AWD vehicle is better able to climb steeper roads under snowy or
slippery conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. There is little differ-
CONTINUED
7-37
ence in handling, however, during extremely sharp turns or sudden brak-

ing. Therefore, when driving down a slope or turning corners, be sure to
reduce your speed and maintain an ample distance from other vehicles.
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size, circum-
ference, construction, brand, and load range as the original tires listed on
the tire placard. Using other sizes, circumference or construction may re-
sult in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and
may affect ride, handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
D If you use a temporary spare tire to replace a flat tire, be sure to use
the original temporary spare tire stored in the vehicle. Using other sizes
may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle.
D Always check the cold tire pressure before starting to drive. The rec-
ommended tire pressure is provided on the tire placard, which is located
under the door latch on the drivers side.
D Tire chains should always be placed on the front wheels only.
D There are some precautions that you must observe when towing your
vehicle. For detail information, see the Towing section in chapter 8.
Off road driving
WARNING
D Always maintain a safe driving speed according to the road
and weather conditions in order to avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden braking or under other similar condi-
tions.
D Always use the utmost care in driving overconfidence
because you are driving an all wheel drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
B All AWD models except OUTBACK SPORT

Your AWD vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all
terrain vehicle. It is a passenger car designed primarily for on-road
7-38
use. The AWD feature gives it some limited off-road capabilities in sit-
uation in which driving surfaces a relatively level, obstruction-free and
otherwise similar to on-road driving conditions. Operating it under oth-
er than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress
which might result in damage not eligible for repair under warranty. If
you do take your SUBARU off road, you should review the common
sense precautions in the next section (applicable to the OUTBACK)
for general guidance. But please keep in mind that your vehicles off-
road capabilities are more limited than those of the OUTBACK.
Never attempt to drive through pools and puddles, or roads flooded
with water. Water entering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or
water splashing onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and
may cause it to stall.
B OUTBACK SPORT
Because of the AWD feature and higher ground clearance, your Sub-
aru can be driven on ordinary roads or off-road. But please keep in
mind that an AWD Subaru is a passenger car and is neither a conven-
7
tional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take your
Subaru off-road, certain common sense precautions such as the fol-
lowing should be taken:
D Make certain that you and all of your passengers are wearing seat
belts.
D Carry some emergency equipment, such as a towing rope or
chain, a shovel, wheel blocks, first aid kit and portable phone or citi-
zens band radio.
D Drive carefully. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in danger-
ous areas or over rough terrain.
D Slow down and employ extra caution at all times. When driving off-
road, you will not have the benefit of marked traffic lanes, banked
curves, traffic signs and the like.
D Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead, drive either straight up
or straight down the slopes. A vehicle can much more easily tip over
sideways than it can end over end. Avoid driving straight up or down
slopes that are too steep.
D Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, especially at higher speeds.
CONTINUED
7-39
D Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel. A bad

bump could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive with
your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.
D If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water and the bottom of the stream bed
for firmness and ensure that the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The water should be shallow
enough that it does not reach the vehicles undercarriage. Water en-
tering the engine air intake or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your vehicle and may cause it to
stall. Never attempt to drive through rushing water; regardless of its
depth, it can wash away the ground from under your tires, resulting in
possible loss of traction and even vehicle rollover.
D Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driv-
ing in sand, mud or water. Do this by driving slowly and stepping on
the brake pedal. Repeat that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
D Do not drive or park over or near flammable materials such as dry
grass or fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The exhaust system is
very hot while engine is running and right after the engine stops. This
could create a fire hazard.
D After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand, etc. adhering
to or trapped on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials trapped or ad-
hering to the underbody, a mechanical breakdown or fire could occur.
D Secure all cargo carried inside the vehicle and make certain that it
is not piled higher than the seatbacks. During sudden stops or jolts,
unsecured cargo could be thrown around in the vehicle and cause
injury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. Those loads raise the ve-
hicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
D If you must rock the vehicle to free it from sand or mud, depress
the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and
forth between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the
best possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free
the vehicle.
7-40
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better
traction by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st
(both for MT and AT).
D Never equip your vehicle with tires larger than those specified in
this manual.
D Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle under hard-driving conditions
such as rough roads or off roads will necessitate more frequent re-
placement of engine oil, brake fluid and transmission oil than that spe-
cified in the maintenance schedule described in the Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet.
Remember that damage done to your Subaru while operating it off-
road and not using common sense precautions such as those listed
above is not eligible for warranty coverage.
Winter driving
7
HG0315
B Operation during cold weather

Carry some emergency equipment, such as tire chains, a window
scraper, a bag of sand, flares, a small shovel, and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold temperatures reduce battery ca-
pacity. The battery must be in good condition to provide enough pow-
er for cold winter starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and viscosity for cold weather.
CONTINUED
7-41
Heavy summer oil will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing by squirting them with deicer or
glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage or separate the rubber
weather strips around the door. If the door is frozen, use hot water to
melt the ice, and afterwards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that contains an antifreeze solution. Do
not use engine antifreeze or other substitutes because they may dam-
age the paint of the vehicle.
n Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any snow or ice from your shoes
because that could make the pedals slippery and dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before driving, check that the accelera-
tor pedal, brake pedal, and all other controls operate smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow that has accumulated under the fenders to
avoid making steering difficult. During severe winter driving, stop
when and where it is safe to do so and check under the fenders peri-
odically.
n During cold weather below 4F (20C)
If the engine is difficult to start using the normal method (without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal), turn the ignition switch to the
START position while slightly depressing the accelerator pedal.
n Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle.
Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle if you park the vehicle in snow with the engine running.
Do not use the parking brake when parking for long periods in cold
weather since it could freeze in that position. Instead, observe the fol-
lowing:
7-42
1. Place the shift lever in 1 or R for manual transmission vehicles,

and in P for automatic transmission vehicles.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or when it snows, raise the wiper
blades off the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked after use on roads heavily cov-
ered with snow, or has been left parked during a snowstorm, icing
may develop on the brake system, which could cause poor braking
action. Check for snow or ice buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it, being careful not to damage
the disc brakes and brake hoses and ABS harness.
n Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in the fuel system and the risk
of its freezing, use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel tank is recom-
mended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically designed for this purpose. 7
When an antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts longer if the tank is
refilled whenever the fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used for an extended period, it is
best to have the fuel tank filled to capacity.
B Driving on snowy and icy roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads such as snowy or
icy roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid sudden braking, abrupt accel-

eration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning when driving on snowy
or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the engine brake effectively to con-
trol the vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear when necessary.)
CONTINUED
7-43
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such behavior can cause the wheel to
lock, possibly leading to loss of vehicle control.
Avoid locking the front wheels because that can lead to a loss of
steering control. When braking with a vehicle not equipped with an
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), press the brake pedal repeatedly at
short intervals to prevent the wheels from locking. Then apply the
brakes softly to bring the vehicle to a stop.
An ABS enhances your vehicles braking performance on snowy and
icy roads. Refer to the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) in this chapter
for information on braking on slippery surfaces in ABS equipped
vehicle.
n Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield or rear window. If the wiper blades are frozen
to the windshield or rear window, use the defroster with the airflow
control dial in the position and the temperature control dial
turned fully to the right until the wiper blades are completely thawed
out. To thaw out the rear wiper blade, use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts to stick on the surface of
the windshield despite wiper operation, use the defroster with the air-
flow control dial in and the temperature control dial turned fully
to the right. After the windshield gets warmed enough to melt the fro-
zen snow on it, wash it away using the windshield washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the wiper from working effec-
tively. If snow is stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to a safe
place, then remove it. If you stop the car at the side of the road, use
the hazard warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type wiper blades during the sea-
sons you could have snow and sub-zero temperature.
7-44
J Snow tires
WARNING
D When replacing original tires with winter (snow) tires, make
sure you use only the same size, construction and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes and
construction may affect speedometer/odometer calibration and
clearance between the body and tires. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D You must install four winter tires that are of the same size, cir-
cumferences, construction, brand, and load range. Mixing other
sizes, circumferences or constructions may result in severe me-
chanical damage to the drive train of your vehicle and may affect
ride, handling, braking and speedometer/odometer calibration. It
also may be dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle control.
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
7
Your vehicle is equipped with all season tires which are designed to
provide an adequate measure of traction, handling and braking per-
formance in year-round driving. In winter, it may be possible to en-
hance performance through use of tires designed specifically for win-
ter driving conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your vehicle, be sure to use the
correct tire size and type. You must install four winter tires that are of
the same size, construction, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires since this may result in dan-
gerous handling characteristics. When you choose a tire, make sure
that there is enough clearance between the tire and vehicle body.
Remember to drive with care at all times regardless of the type of tires
on your vehicle.
CONTINUED
7-45
J Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be fitted with P205/60R15 tires for OUTBACK
and P205/55R16 tires for RS because of lack of clearance
between the tire and body.
Driving on snowy grades or icy roads may require the use of tire chains,
in which case put the chains on the front wheels only. Use only SAE
class S type chains that are of the correct size for your tires so as not to
damage the vehicle body or suspension.
When driving with tire chains, drive at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h).
When a temporary spare tire is on a front wheel, replace the temporary
spare tire with the rear tire on the same side of the vehicle, and then fit
chains on the front tires.
Always use the utmost care when driving with tire chains overconfi-
dence because you are driving with tire chains could easily lead to a se-
rious accident.
J Rocking the vehicle

If you must rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, depress
the accelerator pedal slightly and move the selector lever back and forth
between D and R repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For the best
possible traction, avoid spinning the wheels when trying to free the ve-
hicle.
When the road surface is extremely slippery, you can obtain better trac-
tion by starting the vehicle with the transmission in 2nd than 1st (both for
MT and AT).
Refer to the Automatic transmission section in this chapter for informa-
tion on holding the transmission in 2nd position.
J Corrosion protection
Refer to the Corrosion protection section (chapter 9).
7-46
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
D Never allow passengers to ride on the folded rear seatback in
the trunk or in the cargo area. Doing so may result in serious in-
jury.
D Never stack luggage or other cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble forward and injure passengers
in the event of a sudden stop or accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as possible.
D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it when-
ever you can to prevent it from being thrown around inside the
vehicle during sudden stops, sharp turns or in an accident.
D Do not pile heavy loads on the roof. These loads raise the
vehicles center of gravity and make it more prone to tip over.
D Secure skis and other lengthy items properly to prevent them
from shooting forward and causing serious injury during a sud- 7
den stop.
D Never exceed the maximum load limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
D Do not place anything on the rear shelf behind the rear seat-
back (for sedan and coupe) or the extended luggage cover (for
wagon and OUTBACK SPORT). Such items could tumble forward
in the event of a sudden stop or a collision. This could cause
serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous items inside the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry unneeded cargo.
CONTINUED
7-47
J Vehicle capacity weight
Tire information label
HG0347 HG0278
The load capacity of your vehicle is determined by weight, not by avail-

able cargo space. The maximum load you can carry in your vehicle is
shown as the Vehicle Capacity Weight on the tire information label at-
tached to the drivers side door jamb. It includes the total weight of driver
and all passengers and their belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, etc., and the tongue load of a
trailer.
J GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and

Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification plate
HG0342
The certification plate attached to the drivers side door jamb shows
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
7-48
Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must never exceed the GVWR. GVW is
the combined total of weight of the vehicle, fuel, driver, all passengers,
luggage, any optional equipment and trailer tongue load. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation. The GVWR equals Curb
Weight (actual weight of your vehicle including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle capac-
ity weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to each axle (GAW) must never ex-
ceed the GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
luggage inside the vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is lower than the vehicle capacity
weight, either front or rear GAW may exceed the GAWR, depending on
the distribution of the luggage.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you should confirm that GVW and
front and rear GAWs are within the GVWR and GAWR by putting your
vehicle on a vehicle scale, found at a commercial weighing station. 7
Do not use replacement tires with a lower load range than the originals
because they may lower the GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher load range than the originals do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Trailer towing
Your car is designed and intended to be used primarily as a passenger-
carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional loads on your cars en-
gine, drive train, brakes, tires and suspension and has an adverse effect
on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety and satisfaction depend
upon proper use of correct equipment and cautious operation of your ve-
hicle. Seek the advice of a professional trailer and/or hitch supplier to
assist you in purchasing a hitch and other necessary towing equipment
appropriate for your vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the instructions
on correct installation and use provided by the trailer and other towing
CONTINUED
7-49
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for injuries or vehicle damage that
result from trailer towing equipment, or from any errors or omissions in
the instructions accompanying such equipment or for your failure to fol-
low the proper instructions.
B Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to vehicle damage or malfunction
caused by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to tow a trailer, more
frequent maintenance will be required due to the additional load.
Under no circumstances should a trailer be towed with a new vehicle
or a vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmis-
sion, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km) of driving.
B Maximum load limits
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum load limits explained below. Exceed-
ing the maximum load limits could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) with
brakes must never exceed 1,500 lbs (681 kg).
The Gross Vehicle Weight (i.e., the combined weight of vehicle, driver,
passengers, luggage, trailer hitch, trailer tongue load and any other
optional equipment installed on your vehicle) must never exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). GVWR is shown on the certifi-
cation plate located on the left center pillar of your vehicle.
The total weight applied to each axle must never exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear GAWR are also shown
on the certification plate.
The maximum trailer tongue load must never exceed 150 lbs. (68 kg).
The tongue load can be adjusted by proper distribution of the load in
the trailer. Never load the trailer with more weight in the back than the
front; approximately 60 percent of the trailer load should be in the
7-50
front and approximately 40 percent in the rear. Also, distribute the

load as evenly as possible on both the left and right sides.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to confirm that the total weight
and weight distribution are within safe driving limits, you should have
your vehicle and trailer weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to prevent a change in weight
distribution while driving.
J Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body of your vehicle to install a
commercial trailer hitch. If you do, dangerous exhaust gas, water
or mud may enter the passenger compartment through the drilled
hole. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a colorless and
odorless gas which is dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled. Also,
drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could cause dete- 7
rioration of strength of your vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
D Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, or
other system when installing a hitch or other trailer towing equip-
ment.
D Adequate size trailer brakes are required when the trailer and
its cargo exceed 700 lbs (318 kg) total weight.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. SUBARU does not of-
fer accessory trailer hitches. Consult with a professional hitch supplier to
assist you in choosing an appropriate hitch for your vehicle. Be sure to
follow all of the hitch manufacturers instructions for installation and use.
CONTINUED
7-51
B Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct splicing or other improper connection may damage your
vehicles electrical system and cause a malfunction of your ve-
hicle lighting system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer concerning the connection

of wires for trailer lights. Check for correct operation of the turn sig-
nals and brake lights and parking lights each time you hitch up.
B Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle, check that the standard side
mirrors provide a good rearward field of view without significant blind
spots. If significant blind spots occur with the vehicles standard side
mirrors, use towing mirrors that conform with Federal, state/province
and/or other applicable regulations.
B Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.
Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure
of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead
to an accident.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle are properly inflated to the
pressure specified on the tire placard located on the left center pillar
of your vehicle.
7-52
HG0278
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure
should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers speci-
fications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire when towing a trailer, ask a
commercial road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your vehicle or trailer as a pre- 7
caution against getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tire is firmly
secured.
B Trailer towing tips
When towing a trailer, steering, stability, stopping distance and brak-
ing performance will vary from normal operation. For safetys sake,
you should employ extra caution when towing a trailer and you should
never speed.
You should also keep the following tips in mind:
Sufficient time should be taken to learn the feel of the vehicle/trailer
combination before starting out on a trip. In an area free of traffic,
practice turning, stopping and backing up.
You should allow for considerably more stopping distance when tow-
ing a trailer. Avoid sudden braking because it may result in skidding
or jackknifing and loss of control.
Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accelerations. If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, always start out in 1st gear and release the
CONTINUED
7-53
clutch at moderate engine rpm.

Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and rapid lane changes.
Slow down before turning. Make a longer than normal turning radius
because the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle wheels to
the inside of the turn. In a tight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.
Crosswinds will adversely affect the handling of your vehicle and trail-
er, causing sway. Crosswinds can be due to weather conditions or the
passing of large trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the
steering wheel and immediately slow down gradually.
When passing other vehicles, considerable distance is required be-
cause of the added weight and length caused by attaching a trailer to
your vehicle.
Before going down a steep hill, slow down and shift into low gear in
order to utilize the engine braking effect and prevent overheating of
your vehicles brakes. Do not make sudden downshifts.
When going uphill on hot days, turn off your air conditioner to reduce
the possibility of engine overheating caused by the added load of the
trailer.
Pay attention to your water temperature gauge.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, avoid using the accel-
erator pedal to stay stationary on an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. This may cause the transmission fluid to
overheat.
Always block the wheels under both vehicle and trailer when parking.
Apply the parking brake firmly. You should not park on a hill or slope.
But if parking on a hill or slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release the regular brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
7-54
4. Apply the regular brakes and then apply the parking brake; slowly
release the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (manual transmission) or P (auto-
matic transmission) and shut off the engine.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the vehicle is in motion, stop
towing the trailer and have repairs carried out immediately by the
nearest SUBARU dealer.
CONTINUED
7-55
In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Temporary spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Tire changing tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Towing eyelets ........................................................... 8-17
8
Hazard warning flasher
HS0053
Day or night, if your vehicle becomes a traffic hazard, use the hazard
warning flasher. Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to safely pull off
the road if a problem occurs. The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing the hazard warning flasher
switch. Turn it off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on, the turn signals do not work.
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap until the engine has
been shut off and has fully cooled down. When the engine is hot,
the coolant is under pressure. Removing the cap while the engine
is still hot could release a spray of boiling hot coolant, which
could burn you very seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the road and stop the vehicle in a
safe place.
8-2
B If steam is coming from the engine compartment

Turn the engine off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it
cools down.
B If no steam is coming from the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine compartment.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If the fan is not turning, im-
mediately turn the engine off and contact your authorized SUBARU
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature has dropped, turn off the en-
gine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the overheated zone, turn the en-
gine off.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down, check the coolant level in
the reserve tank.
If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add coolant up to the
MAX mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, add coolant to the reserve
tank. Then remove the radiator cap and fill the radiator with coolant.
8
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot radiator, first wrap a thick
cloth around the radiator cap, then turn the cap counterclockwise
slowly without pressing down until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been fully released, remove the
cap by pressing down and turning it.
CONTINUED
8-3
Jump starting
WARNING
D Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. Do not let it come in contact
with the eyes, skin, clothing or the vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you, thoroughly flush the exposed area
with water immediately. Get medical help if the fluid has entered
your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water, and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
D The gas generated by a battery explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or light a match while jump start-
ing.
D Never attempt jump starting if the discharged battery is frozen.
It could cause the battery to burst or explode.
D Whenever working on or around a battery, always wear suit-
able eye protectors, and remove metal objects such as rings,
bands or other metal jewelry.
D Be sure the jumper cables and clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables in suitable condition are avail-
able.
D A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
CAUTION
The battery used for boosting must be 12V. Do not jump start un-
less you are sure that the booster battery is correct.
8-4
When your vehicle does not start due to a run down (discharged) bat-
tery, the vehicle may be jump started by connecting your battery to
another battery (called the booster battery) with jumper cables.
Jump starting is dangerous if it done incorrectly. If you are unsure about
the proper procedure for jump starting, consult a competent mechanic.
B How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 volts and the negative terminal
is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not let the two ve-
hicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in the sequence illustrated.
Engine lifting bracket
HG0103
1 Connect one jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal on the

discharged battery.
2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster battery.
3 Connect one end of the other cable to the negative () terminal
of the booster battery.
4 Connect the other end of the cable to the engine lifting bracket.
Make sure that the cables are not near any moving parts and that
the cable clamps are not in contact with any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and run it at
CONTINUED
8-5
moderate speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle that has the dis-
charged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect the cables in exactly the re-
verse order.
Flat tires
WARNING
D Do not jack up the vehicle on an incline or a loose road sur-
face. The jack can come out of the jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a severe accident.
D Use only the jack provided with your vehicle. The jack sup-
plied with the vehicle is designed only for changing a tire. Never
get under the vehicle while supporting the vehicle with this jack.
D Always turn the engine off before raising the flat tire off the
ground using the jack. Never swing or push the vehicle sup-
ported with the jack. The jack can come out of the jacking point
due to a jolt and this can result in a severe accident.
D Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts when the
spare tire is installed. This could cause the nuts to become loose
and lead to an accident.
D Never place a tire or tire changing tools in the passenger
compartment after changing wheels. In a sudden stop or colli-
sions, loose equipment could strike occupants and cause injury.
Store the tire and all tools in the proper place.
If you have a flat tire while driving, never brake suddenly; keep driving
straight ahead while gradually reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, whenever possible, then stop the en-
gine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and shift a manual transmission ve-
hicle in reverse or an automatic transmission vehicle in the P (Park)
position.
8-6
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher and have everyone get out of the
vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire diagonally opposite
the flat tire.
OM-H0167
5. Take out the spare tire, jack, and wheel nut wrench. See the Tire
changing tools in this chapter.
6. (If your vehicle has wheel covers) Insert the wheel cover remover into
the notch provided in the wheel cover, and pry it off.
8
HGA012BA
CONTINUED
8-7
7. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel nut wrench but do not remove
the nuts.
OM-H0376
8. Place the jack under the side sill at the front or rear jack-up point clos-
est to the flat tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack head engages firmly into the
jack-up point.
OM-H0170
9. Insert the jack handle into the jackscrew, and turn the handle clock-
wise until the tire clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle higher than
necessary.
8-8
OM-H0171
10. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

11. Before putting the spare tire on, clean the mounting surface of the
wheel and hub with a cloth.
OM-H0172 HG0104
12. Put on the spare tire. Replace the wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
13. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
14. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely tighten the wheel nuts to the
specified torque, following the tightening order in the illustration.
CONTINUED
8-9
OM-H0173
The torque for tightening the nuts is 58 to 72 ft-lb (78 to 98 N-m, 8 to 10

kg-m). This torque is equivalent to applying about 88 to 110 lbs (40 to 50
kg) at the top of the wheel nut wrench. Never use your foot on the wheel
nut wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest
automotive service facility.
15. Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment.
When storing a conventional tire, put the spacer upside down and tight-
en the attaching bolt firmly.
Attaching bolt
Flat tire
Spacer
HS0153
Also store the jack and wheel nut wrench in their storage locations. See
Tire changing tools in this section.
8-10
J Temporary spare tire
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the temporary spare tire is used. The
temporary spare tire is not designed to sustain the towing load.
Use of the temporary spare tire when towing can result in failure
of the spare tire and/or less stability of the vehicle and may lead
to an accident.
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire other than the original. Using
other sizes may result in severe mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a temporary spare tire. This tire is smaller and lighter
than a conventional tire and is designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon
as possible because the spare tire is designed only for temporary use.
8
Check the inflation pressure of the temporary spare tire at 60 psi (420
kPa, 4.2 kg/cm2) periodically to keep the tire ready for use.
When using the temporary spare tire, note the following:
D Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
D Do not put a tire chain on the temporary spare tire. Because of the
smaller tire size, a tire chain will not fit properly .
D Do not use two or more temporary spare tires at the same time.
D Do not drive over obstacles. This tire has a smaller diameter, so
road clearance is reduced.
D When the wear indicator appears on the tread, replace the tire.
CONTINUED
8-11
Indicator
location mark Spare
FWD socket fuse
Tread wear
indicator bar
HG0106 HG0350
HG0349
D (If your vehicle is AWD with automatic transmission) Before

driving your vehicle with the temporary spare tire, put a spare
fuse inside the FWD connector in the main fuse box located in
the engine compartment and confirm that the Front-wheel drive
warning light comes on. The all wheel drive capability of the ve-
hicle has now deactivated. After re-installing the conventional
tire, remove the spare fuse from the FWD connector in order to
reactivate all wheel drive.
8-12
J Tire changing tools

B Spare tire
HG0034 OM-H0175
The spare tire is stored under the floor of the trunk or the cargo area.
To remove the spare tire, first remove the spare tire cover, turn the at-
taching bolt counterclockwise, then take the spare tire out.
B Jack and jack handle
OM-H0176 HG0107 HG0193
The jack is stored on the left side of the trunk or cargo area.
To take out the jack, first pull the tab on the trim cover down to open
the cover, turn the jackscrew counterclockwise to loosen it, then re-
move the jack.
The jack handle is stored under the spare tire cover.
CONTINUED
8-13
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by your SUBARU dealer or a com-
mercial towing service. Observe the following procedures for safety.
B Transporting your vehicle using a flat-bed truck
HG0108
This is the best way to transport your vehicle. Use the following proce-
dures to ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the selector lever into the P position for automatic transmis-
sion vehicles or 1st for manual transmission vehicles.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier properly with safety chains.
Each safety chain should be equally tightened and care must be
taken not to pull the chains so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
B Towing with the front wheels raised off the ground
WARNING
Never tow manual transmission AWD vehicles with the front
wheels raised off the ground while the rear wheels are on the
ground. This will cause the vehicle to spin away due to the opera-
tion or deterioration of the viscous coupling.
8-14
CAUTION
When transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a
flat-bed truck.
HG0109
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to
bring it to the upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the ACC position while the ve-
hicle is being towed. 8
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the ve-
hicle.
B Towing with all wheels on the ground
WARNING
D Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the
vehicle is being towed because the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
D Remember that the brake booster and power steering do not
function when the engine is not running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater effort to operate the brake pedal and
steering wheel.
CONTINUED
8-15
CAUTION
D If transmission failure occurs, transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
D For AWD vehicles or FWD vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, the traveling speed must be limited to less than 20 mph (30
km/h) and the traveling distance to less than 31 miles (50 km). For
greater speeds and distances, transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
D For OUTBACK models, be sure to use a flexible cable for tow-
ing purpose and wrap the towing cable with cloth to prevent dam-
age to the bumper.
OM-H0180
We do not recommend this method of towing. Use this method only

when towing service by a SUBARU dealer or a commercial towing
service is not available.
1. Check the transmission and differential oil levels and add oil to
bring it to the upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the ACC position while the ve-
hicle is being towed.
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to prevent damage to the ve-
hicle.
8-16
J Towing eyelets
CAUTION
D Never use the tie-down eyelet closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
D Do not apply excessive lateral load to the towing eyelets.
Towing eyelets
Towing eyelet
Towing and tie-down eyelets HG0110 HG0197
Never use tie-down eyelet 8

for towing purposes.
HG0111
The towing eyelets should be used only in an emergency (e.g., to free a

stuck vehicle from mud, sand or snow).
CONTINUED
8-17
Appearance care
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Waxing and polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Cleaning aluminum wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9
Exterior care
J Washing
CAUTION
D When washing the vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
D Do not wash the engine compartment and areas adjacent to it.
If water enters electrical parts or the power steering fluid reser-
voir, it will cause engine trouble or faulty power steering respec-
tively.
The best way to preserve your vehicles beauty is frequent washing.

Wash the vehicle at least once a month to avoid contamination by road
grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of lukewarm or cold water. Do
not wash the vehicle with hot water and in direct sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required. If you use a light detergent,
make certain that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use strong soap or
chemical detergents. All cleaning agents should be promptly flushed
from the surface and not allowed to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the remaining water off with a
chamois or soft cloth.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash, make
sure beforehand that the car wash is of suitable type. If the vehicle
is equipped with a rear spoiler, it may be damaged by the brush, etc.
B Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts, and gravel used for deicing road surfaces are ex-
tremely corrosive, accelerating the corrosion of underbody compo-
nents, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
9-2
Appearance care
cables, floor pan and fenders, and suspension.

Thoroughly flush the underbody and inside of the fenders with luke-
warm or cold water at frequent intervals to reduce the harmful effects
of such agents.
B Using a warm water washer
D Keep a good distance of 12 inches (30 cm) or more between the
washer nozzle and the vehicle.
D Do not wash the same area continuously.
D If a stain will not come out easily, wash by hand. Some warm water
washers are of the high temperature, high pressure type and they can
damage or deform the resin parts such as mouldings, or cause water
to leak into the vehicle.
J Waxing and polishing

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and apply them according to the
manufacturers instructions. Wax or polish when the painted surface is
cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, as well as the painted sur-
faces. Loss of wax on a painted surface leads to loss of the original lus-
ter and also quickens the deterioration of the surface. It is recommended 9
that a coat of wax be applied at least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has diminished to the point where the lus-
ter or tone cannot be recovered, lightly polish the surface with a fine-
grained compound. Never polish just the affected area, but include the
surrounding area as well. Always polish in only one direction. A No. 2000
grain compound is recommended. Never use a coarse-grained com-
pound. Coarser grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number
and could damage the paint. After polishing with a compound, coat with
wax to restore the original luster. Frequent polishing with a compound or
an incorrect polishing technique will result in removing the paint layer
and exposing the undercoat. When in doubt, it is always best to contact
your SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specialist.
CONTINUED
9-3
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and built to resist corrosion. Special
materials and protective finishes have been used on most parts of the
vehicle to help maintain fine appearance, strength, and reliable opera-
tion.
B Most common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retaining dirt and debris in body
panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel
and stone chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust control chemicals, or used in
coastal areas where there is more salt in the air, or in areas where
there is considerable industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity, especially when temperatures
range just above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the vehicle remains for a long time,
even though other parts of the vehicle may be dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corrosion to parts of the vehicle
which cannot dry quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
B To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle frequently. If you drive on salted roads in the winter
or if you live in a coastal area, you should flush the underbody with
fresh water frequently.
After the winter has ended, it is recommended that the underbody be
given a very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the condition of underbody
components, such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, suspension, steering system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should be given an appropriate rust
prevention treatment or should be replaced. Contact your SUBARU
9-4
Appearance care
dealer to perform this kind of maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water and dirt accumulation under
the floor mats because that could cause corrosion. Occasionally
check under the mats to make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. In such a garage, corrosion can be caused by
dampness. If you wash the vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with snow, that can cause
dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather and/or in areas where road
salts and other corrosive materials are used, the door hinges and
locks, trunk lid lock, and hood latch should be inspected and lubri-
cated periodically.
Cleaning aluminum wheels

D Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels clean of any kind of grime or
agent. If dirt is left on too long, it may be difficult to clean off. 9
D Do not use soap containing grit to clean the wheels. Be sure to use a
neutral cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly with water. Do not
clean the wheels with a stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed wash-
ing device.
D Clean the vehicle (including the aluminum wheels) with water as soon
as possible when it has been splashed with sea water, exposed to sea
breezes, or driven on roads treated with salt or other agents.
CONTINUED
9-5
Cleaning the interior

Use a vacuum cleaner to get rid of the dust and dirt. Wipe the vinyl areas
with a clean, damp cloth.
B Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is
caked on the fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum cleaner, use a
soft blush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrung cloth and dry the seat
fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solution of mild
soap and lukewarm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a commercially-available fabric
cleaner. Use the cleaner on a hidden place and make sure it does not
affect the fabric adversely. Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tion.
B Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the SUBARU may be cleaned
using mild soap or detergent and water, after first vacuuming or
brushing away loose dirt. Allow the soap to soak in for a few minutes
and wipe off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial foam-type clean-
ers suitable for synthetic leather materials may be used when neces-
sary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or gasoline must never be used on leather or synthetic
interior materials.
9-6
Maintenance and service

Maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Engine coolant ........................................................... 10-13
Air cleaner element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Manual transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Front differential gear oil (Automatic transmission
vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Rear differential gear oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Clutch fluid (2.5 liter MT models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Brake booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Windshield washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Replacement of windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Brake pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
10
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Replacement of brake pad and lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Parking brake stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Aluminum wheels (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43
Main fuse and fusible link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Installation of accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Headlight .................................................................. 10-47
Fog light (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Front turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51
Side turn signal light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Rear combination lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
License plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Interior light, spot light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
10-2
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items required to be serviced at regular in-
tervals are shown in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the separate Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are required, it is recommended that all
work be done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service by yourself, you should familiar-
ize yourself with the information provided in this section on general main-
tenance and service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could cause improper or unsafe vehicle
operation. Any problems caused by improper maintenance and service
performed by you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
D Testing of a Full-Time All-Wheel Drive vehicle must NEVER be
performed on a single two-wheel dynamometer or similar appara-
tus nor should you install FWD fuse in the engine compartment.
Attempting to do so will result in transmission damage and in 10
uncontrolled vehicle movement and may cause an accident or
injuries to persons nearby.
D Always select a safe area when performing maintenance on
your vehicle.
D Always be very careful to avoid injury when working on the ve-
hicle. Remember that some of the materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or handled, for example, battery
acid.
D Your vehicle should only be serviced by persons fully compe-
tent to do so. Serious personal injury may result to persons not
experienced in servicing vehicles.
CONTINUED
10-3
D Always use the proper tools and make certain that they are
well maintained.
D Never get under the vehicle supported only by jack. Always
use a safety stands to support the vehicle.
D Never keep the engine running in a poorly ventilated area,
such as a garage or other closed areas.
D Do not smoke or allow open flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
D Wear adequate eye protection to guard against getting oil or
other fluids in your eyes. If something does get in your eyes,
thoroughly wash it out with clean water.
D Because the fuel system is under pressure, replacement of the
fuel filter should be performed only by your SUBARU dealer.
D The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Tampering with
or disconnecting the systems wiring could result in accidental
inflation of the airbag or could make the system inoperative,
which may result in serious injury. The wiring harnesses of the
SRS airbag system are covered with yellow insulation and the
connectors of the system are yellow, for easy identification. Do
not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS
airbag system. For required servicing of the SRS airbag, see your
nearest SUBARU dealer.
J Before checking or servicing in the engine compart-

ment
D Always stop the engine and set the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
D Always let the engine cool down. Engine parts become very
hot when the engine is running and remain hot for some time af-
ter the engine is stopped.
D Do not spill engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components. This may cause a fire.
D Always remove the key from the ignition switch. When the
ignition switch is in the ON position, the cooling fan may oper-
ate suddenly even when the engine is stopped.
10-4
J When you do checking or servicing in the engine

compartment while the engine is running
A running engine can be dangerous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away from the cooling fan, belts and any
other moving engine parts. Removing rings, watches and ties is
advisable.
10
CONTINUED
10-5
Engine compartment overview
HGA017BB
1 Manual transmission oil level 7 Windshield washer tank

gauge (MT) (page 10-19) or (page 10-31)
Differential gear oil level 8 Fuse box (page 10-43)
gauge (AT) (page 10-22) 9 Battery (page 10-29)
2 Air cleaner element Q Engine oil filler cap
(page 10-16) (page 10-7)
3 Clutch fluid reservoir W Engine coolant reservoir
(page 10-28) (page 10-13)
4 Automatic transmission fluid E Engine oil level gauge
level gauge (page 10-20) (page 10-7)
5 Brake fluid reservoir R Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 10-26) (page 10-25)
6 Fuel filter T Radiator cap (page 10-13)
10-6
Engine oil
B Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel stop.
Upper Notch
level
Lower
level
HG0351 OM-H0189
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and stop the engine.

2. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and insert it again.
3. Be sure the dipstick is correctly inserted until it stops with the
graphic symbol on its top appearing as shown in the illustra-
tion.
4. Pull out the dipstick again and check the oil level on it. If it is below
the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
CAUTION 10
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
If you check the oil level just after stopping the engine, wait a few min-
utes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the level.
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, the engine oil level
reading may be in a range between the upper level and the notch
mark. This is caused by thermal expansion of the engine oil.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not add any additional oil
above the upper level when the engine is cold.
CONTINUED
10-7
B Changing the oil and oil filter

Change the oil and oil filter according to the maintenance schedule in
the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
The engine oil and oil filter must be changed more frequently than
listed in the maintenance schedule when driving on dusty roads,
when short trips are frequently made, when towing a trailer or when
driving in extremely cold whether.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the engine idle for about 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
Drain plug OM-H0190
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing the drain plug while the en-
gine is still warm. The used oil should be drained into an appropriate
container and disposed of properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain plug with a clean cloth and
tighten it securely with a new sealing washer after the oil has com-
pletely drained out.
10-8
Oil filter
Sealing washer
Drain plug
OM-H0191 OM-H0192
6. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.

7. Before installing a new oil filter, apply a thin coat of engine oil to the
seal.
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of the lower crank case and
install the oil filter by hand turning. Be careful not to twist or damage
the seal.
9. Tighten it approximately two-thirds of a turn after the seal makes
contact with underside of the crank case.
CAUTION
Never over tighten the oil filter because that can result in an oil
leak.
10
10. Pour the specified amount of engine oil through the filler neck.
Oil capacity: 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
11. Start the engine and make sure that no oil leaks appear around
the filters rubber seal.
12. Run the engine until it reaches the normal operating temperature.
Then stop the engine and wait a few minutes to allow the oil drain
back. Check the oil level again and if necessary, add more engine oil.
CONTINUED
10-9
B Recommended grade and viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recommended grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API classification SJ or SH with the words ENERGY

CONSERVING II (if you cannot obtain the oil with SJ
or SH grade, you may use SG grade oil.) or the new
API mark (Starburst mark) displayed on the container.
API Service label New API Certification Mark

(Starburst Mark)
1
1 Indicates the oil quality by API designations

2 Indicates the SAE oil viscosity grade
3 Indicates that the oil has fuel saving capabilities
In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well
as one that will add to fuel economy. The following table lists the rec-
ommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as
they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity as those rec-
ommended by SUBARU.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects fuel economy. Oils of lower vis-
cosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of
higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the engine.
10-10
SAE viscosity number and applicable

temperature
OM-H2756
B Recommended grade and viscosity under severe driving

conditions
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in areas with very high tempera-
tures, or used for heavy-duty applications such as towing a trailer, use
of oil with the following grade and viscosities is recommended.
API classification: SJ or SH
SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, 20W-40, 20W-50
10
CONTINUED
10-11
Cooling system
WARNING
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
CAUTION
D The cooling system has been filled at the factory with a high
quality, corrosion-inhibiting, year-around coolant which provides
protection against freezing down to 33F (36C). For adding,
use genuine SUBARU coolant or an equivalent: a mixture of 50%
soft water and 50% ethylene-glycol basis coolant. Use of improp-
er coolants may result in corrosion in the cooling system. It is im-
portant to maintain protection against freezing and corrosion,
even if freezing temperatures are not expected. Never mix differ-
ent kinds of coolant.
D Do not splash the engine coolant over painted parts. The alco-
hol contained in the engine coolant may damage the paint sur-
face.
B Hose and connections

Your vehicle employs an electric cooling fan which is thermostatically
controlled to operate when the engine coolant reaches a specific tem-
perature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate even when the engine
coolant temperature gauge exceeds the normal operating range, the
cooling fan circuit may be defective. Check the fuse and replace it if
necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling system checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is necessary, there may be a leak in the
engine cooling system. It is recommended that the cooling system
and connections be checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
10-12
J Engine coolant
B Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
FULL
level mark
LOW
level mark
HG0114
1. Check the coolant level on the outside of the reservoir while the
engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the LOW level mark, add
coolant up to the FULL level mark. If the reserve tank is empty, re-
move the radiator cap and refill as required.
Rubber gaskets
10
HG0115
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the radiator, reinstall the caps
and check that the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap are in the
proper position.
CONTINUED
10-13
B Changing the coolant
WARNING
been shut off and has cooled down completely. Since the coolant
is under pressure, you may suffer serious burns from a spray of
boiling hot coolant when the cap is removed.
Change the engine coolant in the following procedures according to

the maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let.
1. Place a proper container under the drain plug and loosen the drain
plug.
HGA000BB
2. Loosen the radiator cap to drain the coolant from the radiator. Then
drain the coolant from the reserve tank. Tighten the drain plug secure-
ly.
10-14
Filler neck FULL

level mark
LOW
level mark
Fill up to here
OM-H0197 HG0114
3. Slowly pour the coolant and fill to the radiator filler neck and to the
reserve tanks FULL level mark. Do not pour the coolant too quickly,
as this may lead to insufficient air bleeding and trapped air in the sys-
tem.
Coolant capacity: 6.2 US qt (5.8 liters, 5.2 Imp qt)
Rubber gaskets
10
HG0115
4. Put the radiator cap back on and tighten firmly. At this time, make
sure that the rubber gaskets in the radiator cap are correctly in place.
5. Start and run the engine for more than five minutes at 2,000 to
3,000 rpm.
6. Stop the engine and wait until the coolant cools down (122 to
140F [50 to 60 C]). If there is any loss of coolant, add coolant to the
radiators filler neck and to the reserve tanks FULL level.
CONTINUED
10-15
7. Put the radiator cap and reservoir cap back on and tighten firmly.
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the air cleaner element removed.
The air cleaner element not only filters intake air but also stops
flames if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner element is not
installed when the engine backfires, you could be burned.
The air cleaner element functions as a filter screen. When the element is
perforated or removed, engine wear will be excessive and engine life
shortened.
The air cleaner element is a viscous type. It is unnecessary to clean or
wash the element.
B Replacing the air cleaner element
Replace the air cleaner element according to the maintenance sched-
ule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. Under extremely
dusty conditions, replace it more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
HBA002BB HBA003BB
1. Remove the bolt securing the rear air cleaner element case.
2. Unsnap the three clamps holding the rear air cleaner element
10-16
case.
3. Separate the rear air cleaner element case from the front air clean-
er element case and remove the air cleaner element.
4. Clean the inside of the front and rear air cleaner element cases
with a damp cloth and install a new air cleaner element.
5. Insert the four projections on the rear air cleaner element case into
the slits on the front air cleaner element case and snap the three
clamps on the rear air cleaner element case and then tighten the bolt.
Spark plugs
CAUTION
D When disconnecting the spark plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
D Make sure the cables are replaced in the correct order.
10
HBA004BA
It may be difficult to replace the spark plugs. It is recommended that you

have the spark plugs replaced by your SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced according to the maintenance
schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
CONTINUED
10-17
B Recommended spark plugs
NGK CHAMPION NIPPONDENSO
BKR6E-11 RC10YC4 K20PR-U11

RC8YC4
Drive belts
The alternator, power steering pump, and air conditioner compressor de-
pend on drive belts. Satisfactory performance requires that belt tension
be correct.
HGA005BB
in. (mm)
Deflection
New belt Used belt
0.28 0.35 0.35 0.43

1
(7.0 9.0) (9.0 11.0)
0.30 0.33 0.35 0.40

2
(7.5 8.5) (9.0 10.0)
To check belt tension, place a straightedge (ruler) across two adjacent

pulleys and apply a force of 98 N (22 lb, 10 kg) midway between the
10-18
pulleys by using a spring scale. Belt deflection should be the amount

specified. If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Manual transmission oil

Check the oil level monthly.
Upper level
Lower level
HGA006BB OM-H0210

the lower level, add oil through the dipstick hole to bring the level up
10
to the upper level.
Each oil manufacturer has its own base oils and additives. Never use
different brands together.
Oil grade: API classification GL-5
CONTINUED
10-19
SAE viscosity No. and Applicable Temperature
OM-H0205
Automatic transmission fluid

B Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands largely as its temperature
rises; the fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore,
there are two different scales for checking the level of hot fluid and
cold fluid on the dipstick.
Though the fluid level can be checked without warming up the fluid
on the COLD side, we recommend checking the fluid level when the
fluid is at operating temperature.
n Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the
transmission fluid up to normal operating temperature; 140 to 176F
(60 to 80 C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake.
3. First shift the selector lever in each position. Then shift it in the P
position, and run the engine at idling speed.
10-20
Upper
level
Lower Upper
level level
Lower
level
HGA007BB OM-H0207
4. Pull out the dipstick and check the fluid level on the gauge. If it is
below the lower level on the HOT range, add the recommended au-
tomatic transmission fluid up to the upper level.
n Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without time to warm up the
automatic transmission, check to see that the fluid level is between
the lower level and upper level on the COLD range. If it is below that
range, add fluid up to the upper level. Be careful not to overfill.
B Recommended fluid
Dexron II or Dexron III Type Automatic Transmission Fluid

10
CONTINUED
10-21
Front differential gear oil

(Automatic transmission vehicles)
Check the differential oil level monthly.
Upper level
Lower level
HGA008BB OM-H0210

the lower level, add oil to bring the level up to the upper level.
10-22
OM-H0212
Rear differential gear oil

CAUTION
If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
Filler plug
10
Oil level
Filler hole
Drain plug Drain hole

OM-H0213 OM-H0214
CONTINUED
10-23
Filler hole
Oil level
Filler hole
Drain hole Drain hole

HB0077 HB0078
Remove the plug from the filler hole and check the oil level. The oil
level should be kept even with the bottom of the filler hole. If the oil
level is below the bottom edge of the hole, add oil through the filler
hole to raise the level.
OM-H0205
10-24
Power steering fluid

The power steering fluid expands greatly as its temperature rises; the
fluid level differs according to fluid temperature. Therefore, the dipstick
has two different checking ranges for hot and cold fluids.
B Checking the fluid level when the fluid is hot
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
D When power steering fluid is being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any dirt into the tank. And never use
D Avoid spilling fluid when adding it in the tank.
Check the power steering fluid level monthly.

1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise the temperature of the pow-
er steering fluid up to normal operating temperature, about 140F
(60C).
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and stop the engine.
3. Turn the reservoir cap counterclockwise to remove the fluid level
dipstick, wipe the dipstick clean, and reinsert it. 10
Specified
Specified range
range
HG0120 OM-H2531
CONTINUED
10-25
4. Remove the dipstick again and check the fluid level on it. If it is
below the lower level of the HOT range, add the recommended
steering fluid up to the specified range of the dipstick.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may indicate possible leakage. Con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
B Checking the fluid level when the fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked without warming up the power
steering system (approximately 70F [21C]), read the fluid level on
the COLD range.
B Recommended fluid
Dexron II, Dexron II E or Dexron III Type Automatic Transmis-

sion Fluid
Brake fluid
WARNING
D Never let brake fluid contact your eyes because brake fluid can
be harmful to your eyes. If brake fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
D Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed mois-
ture can cause a dangerous loss of braking performance.
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
10-26
CAUTION
D Never use different brands of brake fluid together.
D When adding brake fluid, be careful not to allow any dirt into
the reservoir.
D Never splash the brake fluid over painted surfaces or rubber
parts. Alcohol contained in the brake fluid may damage them.
Check the fluid level monthly.
HGA009BB
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is be-
low MIN, add the recommended brake fluid to MAX.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed container.
B Recommended brake fluid
10
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
CONTINUED
10-27
Clutch fluid (2.5 liter MT models)
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your eyes because clutch fluid can
be harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing eye protection is advisable.
CAUTION
D Clutch fluid absorbs moisture from the air. Any absorbed
moisture can cause improper clutch operation.
D If the vehicle requires frequent refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
D Never use different brands of clutch fluid together.
D When clutch fluid is added, be careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the reservoir. If the level is below
MIN level mark, add the recommended clutch fluid to MAX level mark.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed container.
MAX
level mark
MIN level mark
HG0355
10-28
B Recommended clutch fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or 4 brake fluid
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as described below, have it
checked by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake pedal several times, applying
the same pedal force each time. The distance the pedal travels should
not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start the engine. The pedal should
move slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine and keep the pedal
pressed for 30 seconds. The pedal height should not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for about one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to check the brake booster.
Brake booster operates properly if the pedal stroke decreases with each
depression.
Battery
WARNING 10
D Before beginning work on or near any battery, be sure to extin-
guish all cigarettes, matches, and lighters. Never expose a bat-
tery to an open flame or electric sparks. Batteries give off a gas
which is highly flammable and explosive.
D For safety, in case an explosion does occur, wear eye protec-
tion or shield your eyes when working near any battery. Never
lean over a battery.
D Do not let battery fluid contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help immediately if acid has entered the
CONTINUED
10-29
eyes.
D To lessen the risk of sparks, remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and anything connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short circuit will result.
D Keep everyone including children away from the battery.
D Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.
D Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after han-
dling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes when charging the battery be-
cause it will shorten battery life.
Cap
Upper level
Lower level
OM-H1048
It is unnecessary to periodically check the battery fluid level or peri-

odically refill with distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below the lower level, remove the
cap. Fill to the upper level with distilled water.
10-30
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer fluid because it could cause
paint damage.
Check the level of the washer fluid at each fuel stop. If the level is low, fill
the fluid up to the neck of the reservoir.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield washer fluid is unavailable use
clean water.
In areas where water freezes in winter, use an anti-freeze type windshield
washer fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid contains 58.5% methyl
alcohol and 41.5% surfactant, by volume. Its freezing temperature varies
according to how much it is diluted, as indicated below.
Washer Fluid Concentration Freezing Temperature
30% 10.4F(12C)
50% 4 F(20C)
100% 49F(45C)
10
HG0122
CONTINUED
10-31
Replacement of windshield wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materials on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the outer surface of the windshield (or
rear window) and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a
neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse the wind-
shield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if
beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.
CAUTION
Do not clean the wiper blades with gasoline or a solvent, such as
paint thinner or benzene. This will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking ever after following this method,
replace the wiper blades using the following procedures:
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by holding its pivot area and push-
ing it in the direction shown by the arrow while depressing the wiper
blade stopper.
Stopper
HS0190
3. Grasp the locked end of the blade rubber assembly and pull it firmly
until the stoppers on the rubber are free of the metal support.
10-32
Metal support
HS0191
4. If the new blade rubber is not provided with two metal spines, remove
the metal spines from the old blade rubber and install them in the new
blade rubber.
Metal spines
10
HS0192
5. Align the claws of the metal support with the grooves in the rubber
and slide the blade rubber assembly into the metal support until it locks.
Be sure to position the claws at the end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper blade may scratch the windshield.
CONTINUED
10-33
Stopper
HS0193 HS0194
6. Install the wiper blade assembly to the wiper arm. Make sure that it
locks in place.
7. Lower the wiper arm.
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play and reserve distance according to the
maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
B Checking the brake pedal free play
0.04 0.12 in
(1.0 3.0 mm)
OM-H0224
Stop the engine and firmly depress the brake pedal several times.
Lightly press the brake pedal down with one finger to check the free
play with a force of less than 10 N (2 lb., 1 kg).
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your
10-34
SUBARU dealer.
B Checking the brake pedal reserve distance
More than
2.56 in
(65 mm)
OM-H0225
Depress the pedal with a force of approximately 294 N (66 lb., 30 kg)
and measure the distance between the upper surface of the pedal
pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than the specification, or when the
pedal does not operate smoothly, contact with your SUBARU dealer.
10
CONTINUED
10-35
Clutch pedal (Manual transmission vehicles)

Check the clutch pedal free play and reserve distance according to the
maintenance schedule in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet.
B Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disengagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there are no abnormal noises
when the clutch pedal is depressed, and that shifting into 1st or re-
verse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal slowly to check that the en-
gine and transmission smoothly couple without any sign of slippage.
B Checking the clutch pedal free play
2.5L MT models
0.11 5.59 in
(3.0 15.0 mm)
2.2L MT models
0.40 0.79 in
(10.0 20.0 mm)
OM-H0224
Lightly press the clutch pedal down with your finger until you feel re-
sistance, and check the free play.
If the free play is not within proper specification, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
10-36
Replacement of brake pad and lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the scraping noise from the audi-
ble brake pad wear indicator, it will result in the need for costly
brake rotor repair or replacement.
OM-H0163
The front disc brake has an audible wear indicator on the brake pads.
For RS models, the right side rear disc brake also has a audible wear
indicator. If the brake pads wear close to their service limit, the wear indi-
cator makes a very audible scraping noise when the brake pedal is ap-
plied.
10
If you hear this scraping noise each time you apply the brake pedal,
have the brake pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
B Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining, use only genuine SUBARU
parts. After replacement, the new parts must be broken in as follows:
n Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40 mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on
the brake pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more times.
CONTINUED
10-37
n Parking brake lining
WARNING
A safe location and situation should be selected for break-in driv-
ing.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of about 22 mph (35 km/h).

2. With the parking brake release button pushed in, pull the parking
brake lever SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pulling with a force of approxi-
mately 147 N [15 Kg, 33 lb].)
3. Drive the vehicle for about 220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking brake to cool down. Repeat
this procedure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the parking brake stroke is out
of the specified range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut located
on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke: 7 8 notches / 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb.)
Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke according to the maintenance schedule
in the Warranty and Maintenance Booklet. When the parking brake is
properly adjusted, braking power is fully applied by pulling the lever up
seven to eight notches gently but firmly (about 196 N, 44 lb., 20 kg). If
the parking brake lever stroke is not within the specified range, have the
brake system checked and adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
10-38
7 to 8 notches
HG0360
Tires and wheels
WARNING
D When replacing a tire, make sure you use only the same size,
circumference, construction brand, and load range as the original
tires listed on the tire placard. Using other sizes, circumferences
or construction may result in severe mechanical damage to the
drive train of your vehicle and may affect ride, handling, braking,
speedometer/odometer calibration, and clearance between the
body and tires. It also may be dangerous and lead to loss of ve-
hicle control. 10
D Do not use a combination of radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
D Do not let air out of warm tires to adjust pressure. Doing so
will result in low tire pressure.
The tires should be checked frequently for proper tire pressure, wear,
and cuts.
J Tire pressure
For the best balance between fuel economy, tire life, ride comfort, and
handling, tire pressure should be maintained in accordance with specifi-
CONTINUED
10-39
cations. Check the tire pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means that
the vehicle has been parked for three hours or has been driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
HG0278
The recommended tire pressure and sizes are provided on the tire plac-
ard, which is located under the door latch on the drivers side.
J Tire rotation
Tire wear will vary with each wheel. To increase the life of tires and keep
wear uniform, it is best to rotate them every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
When rotating tires, replace any unevenly worn or damaged tire. After
rotating the tires, adjust tire pressure and be sure to check wheel nut
tightness.
New tread Worn tread
Tread wear indicator
OM-H0230 OM-H0231
A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a
10-40
solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when the remaining
tread has been worn to 0.063 in (1.6 mm) or less.
B Wheel covers
n Removing the wheel cover
HGA012BA
Insert the wheel cover remover into the notch provided, and pry the
wheel cover off.
n Installing the wheel cover
10
HGA013BA
Align the valve with the valve hole in the cover, then fit the cover on
the wheel by tapping your hand evenly around the circumference of
the cover.
CONTINUED
10-41
NOTE
When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation
or to change a flat tire, always check the tightness of the wheel
nuts after driving approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is
loose, tighten it to the specified torque.
Aluminum wheels (if equipped)

Aluminum wheels can be scratched and damaged easily. Handle them
carefully to maintain their appearance, performance, and safety.
D When any of the wheels is removed and replaced for tire rotation or to
change a flat, always check the tightness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
D Never apply oil to the threaded parts, wheel nuts, or tapered surface
of the wheel.
D Never let the wheel rub against sharp protrusions or curbs.
D Be sure to fit tire chains on uniformly and completely around the tire,
otherwise the chains may scratch the wheel.
D When wheel nuts, balance weights, or the center cap are replaced,
be sure to replace them with genuine SUBARU parts designed for alumi-
num wheels.
10-42
Fuses
HS0202 HG0127
The fuses are designed to melt during an overload to prevent damage to

the wiring harness and electrical equipment. The fuses are located in
two fuse boxes.
If any lights, accessories or other electrical controls do not operate, in-
spect the corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replace it.
Good Blown
10
HS0204
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one having a higher rating or with mate-
rial other than a fuse because serious damage or a fire could re-
sult.
CONTINUED
10-43
B Fuse box (behind the coin tray)

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and turn off all elec-
trical accessories.
HS0202
2. Open the coin tray and pull it horizontally to remove it.

3. Determine which fuse may be blown. The back side of the coin
tray and the Fuse and circuits section in chapter 11 in this manual
show the circuit for each fuse.
Fuse puller Fuse puller
Spare fuses
HS0207 HS0208
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is stored in the
main fuse box cover in the engine compartment.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the
same rating. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in
the engine compartment.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a
10-44
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

B Main fuse box (in the engine compartment)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and turn off all elec-
trical accessories.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the main fuse box cover.
4. Determine which fuse may be blown. The fuse box cover and
Fuse and circuits section in chapter 11 in this manual show the cir-
cuit for each fuse.
Fuse puller Fuse puller
Spare fuses
HS0207 HS0208
5. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller provided in the main fuse box
cover.
6. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown, replace it with a spare fuse of the
same rating. The spare fuses are stored in the main fuse box cover in
10
the engine compartment.
7. If the same fuse blows again, this indicates that its system has a
problem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
CONTINUED
10-45
Main fuse and fusible link
HG0127
The main fuses and fusible link are designed to melt during an overload
to prevent damage to the wiring harness and electrical equipment.
Check the main fuses and fusible link if any electrical component fails to
operate (except the starter motor) and other fuses are good. A melted
main fuse or fusible link must be replaced. Use only replacements with
the same specified rating as the melted main fuse or fusible link. If a
main fuse or fusible link blows after it is replaced, have the electrical sys-
tem checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer before installing fog lights or any
other electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such accessories may cause
the electronic system to malfunction if they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehicle.
10-46
Replacing bulbs
J Headlight
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become very hot while in use. If you
touch the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, caus-
ing the bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the
bulb surface, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with al-
cohol.
Rubber cover
Retainer spring
Electrical
connector
OM-H0243 OM-H0261
1. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove the rubber cover. 10

2. Remove the retainer spring.
3. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer spring securely.
4. Install the rubber cover with the top mark facing up, then reconnect
the electrical connector.
CONTINUED
10-47
J Fog light (if equipped)
CAUTION
Halogen light bulbs become very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or greasy gloves, finger prints
or grease on the bulb surface develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger prints or grease on the bulb sur-
face, wipe them away with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol.
B Type A
HGA001BB HGA002BA
1. Remove the front fog light assembly by removing the three bolts.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the front fog light case cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Spring
Connector
OM-H0412
10-48
4. Disconnect the connector behind the case cap.

5. Release the retainer spring.
6. Replace the bulb with a new one. Then reconnect the connectors
and reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
B Type B
HG0325 HG0326
1. Remove the front fog light cover.

2. Remove the front fog light assembly by removing the two bolts.
3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Remove the front fog light case cap by turning it counterclockwise.
10
Connector
Spring
HG0327
5. Disconnect the connector behind the case cap.

6. Release the retainer spring.
7. Replace the bulb with a new one. Then reconnect the connectors
and reinstall the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
CONTINUED
10-49
J Parking light
OM-H0244
1. Remove the parking light assembly mounting screw located at the top
of the headlight assembly using the phillips screwdriver.
2. Move the parking light assembly forward until it pops out from the
fender.
3. Remove the bulb holder from the parking light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a new bulb.
5. Set the bulb holder into the parking light assembly and turn it clock-
wise until it locks.
6. Set the parking light assembly into the fender. Tighten the mounting
screw.
10-50
J Front turn signal light

B Type A
HGA011BB
1. Remove the bolt securing the front turn signal light assembly.
2. Remove the front turn signal light assembly from the front bumper
and remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning
clockwise, then install a new bulb.
4. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of removal.
B Type B
10
HG0194
1. Remove the front turn signal light assembly mounting screws using
the phillips screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens from the front turn signal light assembly.
CONTINUED
10-51
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning

counterclockwise. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens to the front turn signal light assembly and tighten
the mounting screws.
J Side turn signal light
OM-H0246
1. Pull the left side of the turn signal light assembly while moving it for-
ward in relation to the vehicle.
2. Remove the bulb holder from the side turn signal light assembly by
turning it counterclockwise.
4. Set the bulb holder into the side turn signal light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
5. Reinstall the side turn signal light assembly on the side of the front
fender.
10-52
J Rear combination lights

B Sedan and Coupe
HG0241 OM-H0446
1. Remove the spare tire cover.

2. Remove the clip from the rear trunk trim with a regular screw driver.
3. Remove the nut securing the rear trunk trim.
10
OM-H0447
4. Open the rear portion of the side trunk trim panel.

5. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning coun-
terclockwise. Install a new bulb.
7. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with the nut and the clips.
CONTINUED
10-53
B Wagon
HG0195
1. Unlatch the rear combination light cover by pulling the knob. Open
the cover up.
OM-H0449
2. Remove the bulb holder from the rear combination light assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it and turning coun-
terclockwise. Install a new bulb.
4. Set the bulb holder into the rear combination light assembly and
turn it clockwise until it locks.
5. Close the cover and latch the lock.
10-54
J License plate light
HG0198
1. Remove the mounting screws using a phillips screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover and lens.
4. Reinstall the lens and cover.
5. Tighten the mounting screws.
J Interior light, spot light
10
OM-H0250 OM-H0251
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of the lens with a regular screw-
driver.
3. Reinstall the lens.
CONTINUED
10-55
Specifications
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Fuses and circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Bulb chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
J Dimensions
Overall length 172.2 in. (4,375 mm)
Overall width 67.1 in. (1,705 mm)
Overall height 56.3 in. (1,430 mm)*1
55.5 in. (1,410 mm)
Ground clearance 6.5 in. (165 mm)*1
5.7 in. (145 mm)
Front tread 57.5 in. (1,460 mm),
57.9 in. (1,470 mm)*2
Rear tread 57.1 in. (1,450 mm),
57.5 in. (1,460 mm)*2
Wheelbase 99.2 in. (2,520 mm)
*1: OUTBACK
*2: RS
J Maximum load limits

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
Gross axle weight rating to the drivers door jamb.
J Engine
2500 cc
Engine model EJ251
Engine type Horizontally opposed,
liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Engine displacement 149.9 cu in (2,457 cc)
Bore 3.92 in. (99.5 mm)
Stroke 3.11 in. (79.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Firing order 1324
11-2
Specifications
2200 cc
Engine model EJ222
Engine type Horizontally opposed,
liquid cooled 4 cylinder,
4 stroke gasoline engine
Engine displacement 135.0 cu in (2,212 cc)
Bore 3.81 in. (96.9 mm)
Stroke 2.95 in. (75.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Firing order 1324
J Electrical system
Battery
Type MT: 55D23L, AT: 75D23L
Reserve capacity MT: 99 min., AT: 118 min.
Cold cranking ampere MT: 356 amp., AT: 520 amp.
Alternator 12V - 75A
Spark plugs BKR6E-11 (NGK)
RC10YC4, RC8YC4 (CHAMPION)
K20PR-U11 (NIPPONDENSO)
Spark plug gap 0.039 to 0.043 in. (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
J Capacities
2.5 Liter models
Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liter, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liter, 3.5 Imp qt) 11
Transmission oil 3.7 US qt (3.5 liter, 3.1 Imp qt)
Automatic transmission fluid 9.8 US qt (9.3 liter, 8.2 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)
AWD rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 6.2 US qt (5.8 liter, 5.2 Imp qt)
2.2 Liter models
Fuel tank 15.9 US gal (60 liter, 13.2 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liter, 3.5 Imp qt)
CONTINUED
11-3
Transmission oil (AWD) 3.7 US qt (3.5 liter, 3.1 Imp qt)

Automatic transmission fluid 8.9 US qt (8.4 liter, 7.4 Imp qt)
AT differential gear oil 1.3 US qt (1.2 liter, 1.1 Imp qt)
AWD rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant 6.2 US qt (5.8 liter, 5.2 Imp qt)
J Tires
Type Steel belted radial, Tubeless
Size Front and rear P195/60R15
P205/60R15*3
P205/55R16*2
Spare T135/70D16
Pressure Front 32 psi (2.2 kg/cm2, 220 kpa)
Rear 29 psi (2.0 kg/cm2, 200 kpa)
Spare 60 psi (4.2 kg/cm2, 420 kpa)
Wheel size Front and rear 16 x 7JJ*2
15 x 6JJ
Spare 16 x 4T
Wheel alignment
Toe Front 0 " 0.12 in. (0 " 3 mm)
Rear 0 " 0.12 in. (0 " 3 mm)
Camber Front 0*4, 025*5
Rear 055, 110*2
*2: RS
*3: OUTBACK
*4: 2.2 liter
*5: 2.5 liter
11-4
Specifications
Fuses and circuits

B Fuse panel located behind the coin tray
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 Q W E
R T Y U I O P
HS0224
Fuse panel Fuse rating Circuit
1 15A D Heater fan
2 15A D Heater fan
3 Empty
4 20A D Front accessory power socket

D Cigarette lighter
D Remote controlled rear view mirrors
5 10A D Tail light 11

D Parking light
6 15A D SRS airbag
7 15A D Fog light
8 20A D ABS solenoid
9 15A D Radio
D Clock
CONTINUED
11-5
10 Empty
11 15A D Engine ignition system

D SRS airbag
12 10A D Illumination brightness control
13 Empty
14 15A D AT shift lock unit

D ABS control
D Cruise control
15 20A D Windshield wiper and washer

D Rear window wiper and washer
16 20A D Brake light
17 15A D Air conditioner
18 15A D Backup light

D Turn light
D SRS airbag system warning light
19 20A D Rear accessory power socket

D Seat heater
11-6
Specifications
B Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
FWD socket
A
S
K
G
D F L
H
Z
J X
Fusible link HS0225
20 20A D Radiator cooling fan (Main)
21 20A D Radiator cooling fan (Sub)
22 20A D Rear window defogger
23 15A D Hazard warning flasher

D Horn
24 15A D Power door lock
25 10A D Automatic transmission control unit
26 10A D Alternator 11
27 15A D Headlight (right side)
28 15A D Headlight (left side)
29 20A D Lighting switch
30 15A D Clock
D Interior light
CONTINUED
11-7
Bulb chart
Description Wattage Bulb No.
Headlight 12V-60/55W HB2 (H4)
Front turn signal 12V-27W 1156
Side marker/Parking 12V-3.8W 194
Side turn signal 12V-3.8W 194
Rear combination light
Brake/tail and Marker 12V-27/8W 1157
Turn signal 12V-27W 1156
Back-up 12V-27W 1156
High mount stop light (Sedan) 12V-18W 921
High mount stop light (Wagon) 12V-13W 912
License plate light 12V-3.8W 194
Interior light 12V-8W
Fog light 12V-55W H3
11-8
Specifications
Vehicle identification
HG0196
1 Chassis number
2 Emission control label
3 Vacuum hose piping label
4 Vehicle identification number plate
5 Tire placard
6 Certification plate
7 Model number plate 11
CONTINUED
11-9
Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects
Uniform tire quality grading standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Traction AA, A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Temperature A, B, C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Reporting safety defects (USA) ...................................... 12-4
12
For U.S.A.
The following information has been compiled according to Code of Fed-
eral Regulations Title 49, Part 575.
Uniform tire quality grading standards

This information indicates the relative performance of passenger car tires
in the area of treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. This is to
aid the consumer in making an informed choice in the purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The quality grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. However, they do not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diame-
ters of 12 inches or less, or to some limited production tires.
DOT quality grades All passenger car tires must confirm to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
J Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
J Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of as-
12-2
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead
braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, corner-
ing, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
J Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher lev-
els of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re-
quired by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under
inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combina-
tion, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
12
CONTINUED
12-3
Reporting safety defects (USA)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Subaru of America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
12-4

Subaru Impreza Manual 2001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Subaru Impreza Manual 2001

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Subaru Impreza Manual 2001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

Issued: May 2000 A

TOKYO. JAPAN A1820BE

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

and are registered trademarks of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.

copyright 2000 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

This manual describes the following vehicle types.

B Warranties for Canada

How to use this owners manual

Chapter 11: Specifications

Safety precautions when driving

THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

DRINKING AND DRIVING

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Since

DRUGS AND DRIVING

DRIVING WHEN TIRED OR SLEEPY

CAR PHONES AND DRIVING

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

DRIVING WITH PETS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

GAS STATION REFERENCE

Doors and locks 1

Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Engine overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Replacement of brake pad and lining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Doors and locks

J Master, submaster and valet key

Doors and locks

Locking without the key Locking without the key

BACK SPORT) are locked at the same time.

Doors and locks

up while closing the door.

Pull the inside door handle to open an unlocked door.

J Power door locking switches (if equipped)

Doors and locks

J Child safety locks

Keyless entry system (if equipped)

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

The keyless entry system has the following functions.

Doors and locks

n Locking the doors

The Programming Button is located under the drivers side dash

Doors and locks

This indicates that the system is in the Transmitter Programming

1. Remove the phillips screw on the back of the remote transmitter

Security system (if equipped)

Doors and locks

n All entrances protected

The security system can be programmed to operate with one to four

The Status Indicator is a high intensity warning light, located on the

Doors and locks

n The emergency override/programming button

The Emergency Override/Programming button is used to disarm the

n Arming the system

Doors and locks

n Disarming the system

n Personal protection alarm (Panic)

Pressing both buttons together on the remote transmitter activates the

If your remote transmitter fails to operate, the system can be dis-